Pentax Digital Camera K Series K x User Manual

SLR Digital Camera  
Operating Manual  
For optimum camera performance, please read the Operating  
Manual before using the camera.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thank you for purchasing this PENTAX a Digital Camera. Please read this manual  
before using the camera in order to get the most out of all the features and functions.  
Keep this manual safe, as it can be a valuable tool in helping you to understand all the  
camera’s capabilities.  
Lenses you can use  
In general, lenses that can be used with this camera are DA, DA L, D FA and FA J  
lenses and lenses that have an Aperture s (Auto) position. To use any other lens or  
accessory, see p.48 and p.282.  
Regarding copyrights  
Images taken using the a that are for anything other than personal enjoyment  
cannot be used without permission according to the rights as specified in the Copyright  
Act. Please take care, as there are cases where limitations are placed on taking  
pictures even for personal enjoyment during demonstrations, performances or of items  
on display. Images taken with the purpose of obtaining copyrights also cannot be used  
outside the scope of use of the copyright as laid out in the Copyright Act, and care  
should be taken here also.  
Regarding trademarks  
PENTAX, a and smc PENTAX are trademarks of HOYA CORPORATION.  
PENTAX Digital Camera Utility and SDM are trademarks of HOYA CORPORATION.  
SDHC logo is a trademark.  
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the  
United States and other countries. Windows Vista is either a registered trademark or  
trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.  
Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other  
countries.  
SDHC logo is a trademark.  
This product includes DNG technology under license by Adobe Systems Incorporated.  
The DNG logo is either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems  
Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.  
All other brands or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their  
respective companies.  
This product supports PRINT Image Matching III. PRINT Image Matching enabled  
digital still cameras, printers and software help photographers to produce image more  
faithful to their intentions. Some functions are not available on printers that are not  
PRINT Image Matching III compliant.  
Copyright 2001 Seiko Epson Corporation. All Rights Reserved.  
PRINT Image Matching is a trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation.  
The PRINT Image Matching logo is a trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
To users of this camera  
• Do not use or store this device in the vicinity of equipment that generates strong  
electromagnetic radiation or magnetic fields. Strong static charges or the magnetic  
fields produced by equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with the  
monitor, damage the stored data, or affect the product's internal circuitry and cause  
camera misoperation.  
• The liquid crystal panel used in the monitor is manufactured using extremely high  
precision technology. Although the level of functioning pixels is 99.99% or better, you  
should be aware that 0.01% or fewer of the pixels may not illuminate or may illuminate  
when they should not. However, this has no effect on the recorded image.  
• There is a possibility that the illustrations and the display screen of the monitor in this  
manual are different from the actual product.  
For Using Your Camera Safely  
We have paid close attention to the safety of this product. When using this  
product, we request your special attention regarding items marked with the  
following symbols.  
This symbol indicates that violating this item could cause  
serious personal injuries.  
Warning  
This symbol indicates that violating this item could cause minor  
Caution  
or medium personal injuries, or loss of property.  
About the Camera  
Warning  
• Do not disassemble or modify the camera. High voltage areas are present inside the  
camera, with the risk of electric shock.  
• If the camera interior is exposed due to dropping or otherwise damaging the camera,  
never touch the exposed portion. There is a risk of electric shock.  
• Wrapping the strap around your neck is dangerous. Take care that small children do  
not hang the strap around their necks.  
• Do not look directly at the sun through the camera with a telephoto lens attached, as  
viewing the sun may damage your eyes. Viewing the sun directly with a telephoto lens  
may lead to a loss of eyesight.  
• If any irregularities occur during use, such as smoke or a strange odor, stop use  
immediately, remove the batteries or the AC adapter, and contact your nearest  
PENTAX Service Center. Continuing to use the product can cause a fire or electric  
shock.  
• Do not place your finger over the flash when discharging the flash. You may burn  
yourself.  
• Do not cover the flash with clothing when discharging the flash. Discoloration may  
occur.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2
• Some portions of the camera heat up during use. There is a risk of low temperature  
burns when holding such portions for long periods.  
• Should the monitor be damaged, be careful of glass fragments. Also, be careful not  
to allow the liquid crystal to get on your skin or in your eyes or mouth.  
• Depending on your individual factors or physical condition, the use of the camera may  
cause itching, rashes or blisters. In case of any abnormality, stop using the camera  
and get medical attention immediately.  
About Battery Usage  
Warning  
• If any leakage from the batteries should come in contact with your eyes, do not rub  
them. Flush your eyes with clean water and get medical attention immediately.  
Caution  
• This camera uses four AA alkaline, AA lithium or AA Ni-MH batteries. Do not use  
batteries other than those specified here. Using other types of batteries may cause  
the camera to function poorly, or the batteries may explode or cause a fire.  
• AA alkaline and AA lithium batteries cannot be recharged. Do not disassemble the  
batteries. Attempting to charge non-rechargeable batteries or disassembling the  
batteries could result in explosion or leakage.  
• The batteries should be inserted correctly, observing (+) and (-) marks on the  
batteries and the camera. Inserting the batteries incorrectly may cause an explosion  
or fire.  
• When replacing the batteries, do not combine different brands, types or capacities.  
Also, do not combine old batteries with new ones. Doing so may cause the batteries  
to explode or cause a fire.  
• Do not short the batteries or dispose of the batteries in fire. Do not disassemble the  
batteries. The batteries could explode or catch fire.  
• Do not charge any batteries other than rechargeable Ni-MH batteries. The batteries  
could explode or catch fire. Batteries for use with this camera other than Ni-MH  
batteries cannot be charged.  
• If any leakage from the batteries should come in contact with skin or clothes, it may  
cause irritation to the skin. Wash the affected areas thoroughly with water.  
• Remove the batteries from the camera immediately if they become hot or begin to  
smoke. Be careful not to burn yourself during removal.  
About the SD Memory Card  
Warning  
• To avoid the risk of SD Memory Cards from being swallowed by mistake, keep them  
out of the reach of small children. Seek medical attention immediately if an SD  
Memory Card is accidentally swallowed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
About the AC Adapter  
Warning  
• Always use the AC adapter exclusively developed for this product, with the specified  
power and voltage. Using an AC adapter not exclusive to this product, or using the  
exclusive AC adapter with an unspecified power or voltage can cause a fire, electric  
shock, or camera breakdown.  
Caution  
• Do not place or drop heavy objects on or forcefully bend the AC plug cord. Doing so  
may damage the cord. Should the AC plug cord be damaged, consult a PENTAX  
Service Center.  
• Do not touch or short-circuit the terminal area of the AC plug cord while the cord is  
plugged in.  
• Do not plug or unplug the power cord with wet hands. This can cause an electric  
shock.  
• Do not drop the product, or subject it to violent impact. This can cause equipment  
breakdown.  
• To reduce the risk of hazards, use only a CSA/UL certified power supply cord set,  
cord is Type SPT-2 or heavier, minimum NO.18 AWG copper, one end with a molded-  
on male attachment plug cap (with a specified NEMA configuration), and the other is  
provided with a molded-on female connector body (with a specified IEC nonindustrial  
type configuration) or the equivalent.  
Care to be Taken During Handling  
Before Using Your Camera  
• When traveling, take the Worldwide Service Network listing that is included in the  
package. This will be useful if you experience problems abroad.  
• When the camera has not been used for a long time, confirm that it is still working  
properly, particularly prior to taking important pictures (such as at a wedding or during  
traveling). Contents of the recording cannot be guaranteed if recording, playback or  
transferring your data to a computer, etc. is not possible due to a malfunction of your  
camera or recording media (SD Memory Card), etc.  
Precautions on Carrying and Using Your Camera  
• Do not subject the camera to high temperatures or high humidity. Do not leave the  
camera in a vehicle, as the temperature can get very high.  
• Do not subject the camera to strong vibrations, shocks, or pressure. Use a cushion to  
protect the camera from vibrations of motorcycles, automobiles, or ships.  
• The temperature range for camera use is 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F).  
• The monitor may appear black at high temperatures, but will return to normal at  
normal temperatures.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4
• The monitor may respond more slowly at low temperatures. This is due to liquid  
crystal properties, and is not a malfunction.  
• Sudden temperature changes will cause condensation on the inside and outside of  
the camera. Place the camera in your bag or a plastic bag, and remove the camera  
after temperature of the camera and surroundings are equalized.  
• Avoid contact with garbage, mud, sand, dust, water, toxic gases, or salts. These could  
cause the camera to breakdown. Wipe dry any rain or water drops on the camera.  
• Please do not press forcefully on the monitor. This could cause it to break or  
malfunction.  
• Be careful not to overtighten the screw in the tripod socket when using a tripod.  
Cleaning Your Camera  
• Do not clean the product with organic solvents such as thinner, alcohol, or benzene.  
This may cause color fading or discoloration.  
• Use a lens brush to remove dust accumulated on the lens or viewfinder. Never use a  
spray blower for cleaning as it may damage the lens.  
• Please contact a PENTAX Service Center for professional cleaning of the CMOS  
sensor. (This will involve a fee.)  
Storing Your Camera  
• Do not store the camera with preservatives or chemicals. Storage in high  
temperatures and high humidity can cause mold to grow on the camera. Remove the  
camera from its case and store it in a dry and well-ventilated place.  
Other Precautions  
• Periodic inspections are recommended every one to two years to maintain high  
performance.  
Memory Card.  
• Please note that deleting the data recorded on an SD Memory Card or formatting an  
SD Memory Card using a camera or computer will not necessarily delete the data so  
that they cannot be recovered using off-the-shelf data recovery software. Such data  
should be handled and managed at your own risk.  
Regarding Product Registration  
In order to better serve you, we request that you complete the product registration,  
which can be found on the CD-ROM supplied with the camera or on the PENTAX  
website. Refer to p.273 for details. Thank you for your cooperation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Contents  
Approximate Image Storage Capacity and Playback Time (New  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6
Shake...........................................................................................128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
(Resize)............................................................................................ 224  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9
Correcting Defective Pixels in the CMOS Sensor  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11  
Composition of the Operating Manual  
This Operating Manual contains the following chapters.  
1
2
Explains camera characteristics, accessories and the names and functions of  
various parts.  
Explains your first steps from purchasing the camera to taking pictures. Be sure to  
read it and follow the instructions.  
3
Explains the procedures for taking and playing back pictures.  
4
Explains the shooting-related functions.  
5
Explains how to use the built-in flash and external flashes.  
6
Explains the procedures for configuring image processing and setting the file format.  
7
Explains the procedures for playing back, deleting, and protecting images.  
8
Explains the procedures for changing the image size, using image filters and  
processing pictures taken in RAW format.  
9
Explains the procedures for changing the camera settings, such as the monitor  
settings and the image folder naming convention.  
10  
11  
Explains how to connect the camera to a computer, and includes installation  
instructions and a general overview of the provided software.  
Explains troubleshooting, introduces optional accessories and provides various  
resources.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
12  
The symbols used in this Operating Manual are explained below.  
Indicates reference page number explaining a related operation.  
1
Indicates useful information.  
Indicates precautions to take when operating the camera.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Before Using Your  
Camera  
Check the package contents and the names and functions  
of working parts before use.  
a Camera Characteristics ............................14  
Display Indicators ................................................22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
14  
a Camera Characteristics  
• Features a 23.6×15.8 mm CMOS sensor with approximately 12.4 million  
effective pixels for high precision and a wide dynamic range.  
• Features Shake Reduction (SR), an image sensor shifting shake  
reduction system. This enables you to capture sharp pictures with  
minimal camera shake regardless of the lens type.  
1
• Features a viewfinder similar to that of a conventional 35 mm camera,  
with a magnification of approximately 0.85 and field of view of  
approximately 96%, for easier image composition and manual focusing.  
• Features a large 2.7-inch monitor with approximately 230,000 dots, a  
wide viewing angle and brightness and color adjusting functions for  
high-precision viewing performance.  
• Uses AA lithium batteries, AA Ni-MH rechargeable batteries or AA  
alkaline batteries.  
• Features a Live View function for shooting while viewing the subject in  
real-time on the monitor.  
• Movies can be recorded by taking advantage of the camera lens  
properties. The camera can also output composite video so that you can  
view recorded images and movies on a monitor such as a TV screen.  
• A user-friendly design has been implemented in various parts of the  
camera. The large text size, high-contrast monitor and easy-to-use  
menus make the camera easier to operate.  
• The CMOS sensor features a special SP coating to prevent dust sticking  
to the sensor. The Dust Removal function also shakes the CMOS  
sensor for removing collected dust.  
• Features Digital Filters to internally process the image in the camera.  
You can use digital filters such as Star Burst or Soft while taking pictures  
or to process images after taking them.  
• Features Custom Image which allows you to adjust settings while  
previewing the edited image, enabling a wider range of expression.  
• Records in the versatile JPEG format or the high quality and fully  
editable RAW format. You can also select JPEG+RAW and record in  
both formats simultaneously. Pictures taken in RAW format can be  
easily processed internally by the camera.  
• Features Sensitivity Priority mode K that automatically adjusts  
aperture and shutter speed according to the set sensitivity.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
15  
The captured area (view angle) will differ between the a and 35 mm SLR  
cameras even if the same lens is used because the format size for 35 mm film  
and CMOS sensor are different.  
Sizes for 35 mm film and CMOS sensor  
35 mm film:  
36×24 mm  
1
a CMOS sensor: 23.6×15.8 mm  
Angles of view being equal, the focal length of a lens used with a 35 mm camera  
must be approximately 1.5 times longer than that of a. To obtain an angle of  
view framing the same area, divide the focal length of the 35 mm lens by 1.5.  
Example) To capture the same image as a 150 mm lens attached to a 35 mm  
camera  
150÷1.5=100  
Use a 100 mm lens with the a.  
Inversely, multiply the focal length of the lens used with the a by 1.5 to  
determine the focal length for 35 mm cameras.  
Example) If 300 mm lens is used with the a  
300×1.5=450  
Focal length is equivalent to a 450 mm lens on a 35 mm camera.  
Shake Reduction (SR)  
Shake Reduction (SR) on the a features a PENTAX original system  
which uses magnetic force to move the image sensor at high speeds,  
compensating camera shake.  
The camera may generate some operating noise when it is shaken, such  
as when changing the composition of a picture. This is normal and not a  
malfunction.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16  
Checking the Contents of the  
Package  
The following accessories are packaged with your camera.  
Check that all accessories are included.  
1
Hot shoe cover FK  
Eyecup FQ  
Body mount cover  
(Installed on camera)  
(Installed on camera)  
(Installed on camera)  
USB cable  
I-USB7  
Strap  
O-ST53  
Software (CD-ROM)  
S-SW99  
Four AA lithium batteries  
Operating Manual  
(this manual)  
Refer to p.289 for information on optional accessories.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
17  
Names and Functions of Working  
Parts  
Hot shoe  
Power lamp  
Speaker  
1
Self-timer lamp/  
Remote control receiver  
Strap lug  
Microphone  
Card cover  
Mirror  
Lens mount index  
(red dot)  
MF  
AF  
AF coupler  
Lens unlock button  
Lens information  
contacts  
Built-in flash  
Diopter  
adjustment lever  
Viewfinder  
Card access lamp  
PC/AV terminal  
Terminal cover  
Monitor  
Battery cover  
unlock lever  
Tripod socket  
Battery cover  
* In the second illustration, the camera is shown with the Eyecup FQ removed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
18  
Capture Mode  
Functions of buttons, dials and levers used during shooting are noted.  
The factory default settings are explained here. Depending on the button, these  
settings can be changed.  
1
1
5
6
2
3
MF  
AF  
7
4
8
9
0
a
b
c
d
e
f
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
19  
1
2
3
4
5
| (Green) button  
You can assign a function to  
this button. (p.179)  
a
b
c
Q button  
Switches to Playback mode.  
Shutter release button  
Press to capture images.  
U button  
Displays the Live View.  
1
Main switch  
Move to turn the camera on  
and off. (p.51)  
M button  
Displays the status screen  
Displays the control panel  
when the status screen is  
shown. (p.24)  
Lens unlock button  
Press to detach the lens.  
d
e
4 button  
Displays the screen for setting  
the AF point. (p.117)  
mc button  
Sets the EV compensation  
and aperture values. (p.94,  
When the control panel or a  
menu screen is displayed,  
press this button to confirm  
the selected item.  
6
7
Mode dial  
ChangesCapture mode. (p.83)  
Focus mode lever  
Four-way controller  
(2345)  
Opens the Drive Mode/Flash  
Mode/White Balance/  
Switches between autofocus  
mode (p.112) and manual  
focus mode (p.121).  
Sensitivity setup menu (p.78).  
8
9
K/i button  
Press to pop up the built-in  
flash. (p.67)  
When the control panel or a  
menu screen is displayed, use  
this to move the cursor or  
change items.  
e-dial  
Sets the shutter speed,  
aperture, sensitivity and EV  
compensation values.  
f
3 button  
Displays the [A Rec. Mode 1]  
menu (p.79). Next, press the  
four-way controller (5) to  
display other menus.  
0
=/L button  
You can select the function of  
this button either to focus on  
the target or to lock the  
exposurevalue. (p.102, p.108,  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                             
20  
Playback Mode  
Functions of buttons, dials and levers used during playback are noted.  
3
1
1
2
MF  
AF  
5
4
6
7
8
9
0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
21  
1
2
3
Shutter release button  
Press halfway to switch to  
Capture mode.  
7
8
M button  
Displays shooting information  
on the monitor. (p.25)  
Main switch  
Move to turn the camera on  
and off. (p.51)  
4 button  
1
Saves the setting you selected  
in the menu or playback  
screen.  
| (Green) button  
9
0
Four-way controller  
(2345)  
Use this to move the cursor or  
change items in the menu or  
playback screen.  
Press to change the settings,  
such as resetting the values.  
4
5
K/i button  
Press to delete images. (p.75)  
3 button  
e-dial  
Displays the [Q Playback 1]  
menu (p.201). Next, press the  
four-way controller (5) to  
display other menus.  
Use this to enlarge an image  
(p.202) or display multiple  
images at the same time  
6
Q button  
Switches to Capture mode.  
References to Button Names  
In this Operating Manual, the buttons of the four-  
way controller are referred to in the following way.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
22  
Display Indicators  
Monitor  
1
The following indicators  
appear on the monitor  
depending on the status of  
the camera.  
Monitor  
The brightness and the color of the monitor can be adjusted. (p.250, p.251)  
At Start-up or when Operating the Mode Dial  
Guides appear on the monitor for 3 seconds (default setting) when the  
camera is switched on or the mode dial is turned.  
To not show indicators, set [Guide Display] to [Off] in the [R Set-up 1] menu.  
(p.248)  
Program  
P
1
Automatic Exposure  
P
10/10/2009 10:30AM  
2
3
1
2
Capture mode (p.83)  
World time (p.244)  
3
Current date and time (p.56)  
(only when set to Destination)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
23  
Capture Mode  
While shooting, the status screen is displayed showing the current  
shooting function settings. You can change the screen displayed by  
pressing the M button.  
1
AF.A  
Custom Image  
Bright  
P
1/125  
ISO 200  
F5.6  
M
M
M
HDR  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
AUTO  
AF.A  
AWB  
ISO  
-3  
2
1
1
2
+3  
JPEG 12M  
[
]
10/10/’09  
10:30AM  
[
]
37  
JPEG 12M  
37  
Status screen  
Control panel  
Blank  
 Status screen  
(All items are displayed here for explanatory purposes. The actual display may  
differ.)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
AF.A  
P SHIFT  
1/2000  
F2.8  
8
8
9
10  
17  
ISO  
11  
12  
14  
AUTO  
1600  
AWB  
ISO  
18 19 20  
21  
13  
8
-3  
2
1
1
2
+3  
15  
22  
16  
1.0  
JPEG 12M  
G1A1  
[
]
23  
24  
25  
26  
37  
1
2
3
Capture Mode (p.83)  
AE Lock (p.108)  
14 EV bar  
15 Flash Exposure Compensation  
Multi-exposure (p.138)/Digital  
/Cross Processing (p.196)  
16 Adjust White Balance (p.186)  
17 Drive Mode (p.78)  
4
5
6
7
8
9
Custom Image (p.194)  
Focus Mode (p.112)  
AE Metering (p.104)  
Battery level (p.40)  
E-dial guide  
18 White Balance (p.182)  
19 AF point (p.117)  
20 ISO (p.90)  
21 Flash Mode (p.67)  
22 File Format (p.177)  
Shutter speed  
23 JPEG Recorded Pixels (p.174)  
24 JPEG Quality (p.175)  
25 Shake Reduction (p.128)  
26 Remaining image storage capacity  
10 Aperture value  
11 ISO AUTO  
12 Sensitivity (p.90)  
13 EV Compensation (p.107)/  
Exposure Bracketing (p.109)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
24  
 Control panel  
Press the M button in the status screen to display the control panel and change  
settings.  
1
2
Custom Image  
Bright  
1
HDR  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
3
8
4
9
5
6
7
10  
15  
11  
16  
12  
17  
AF.A  
13  
14  
JPEG  
12M  
10/10/’09  
10:30AM  
[
]
18  
19  
37  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Function name  
Setting  
11 Highlight Correction (p.189)  
12 Shadow Correction (p.190)  
13 File Format (p.177)  
Custom Image (p.194)  
Cross Processing (p.196)  
Digital Filter (p.140)  
HDR Capture (p.191)  
Shake Reduction (p.128)  
AE Metering (p.104)  
14 JPEG Recorded Pixels (p.174)  
15 JPEG Quality (p.175)  
16 Distortion Correction (p.192)  
17 Lateral Chromatic Aberration  
18 Date and Time  
10 Select AF point (p.117)  
19 Remaining image storage capacity  
• Settings that cannot be changed due to the current camera setup cannot be  
selected.  
The status screen will disappear if no operations are made within 30 seconds.  
Press the button to display it again.  
If no operations are made within 30 seconds in the control panel, the status  
screen will reappear.  
M
If [Shooting Info Display] is set to  
O
(On) in [Memory] (p.260) of the [  
A
Rec.  
Mode 4] menu and the blank screen is selected, the next time the camera is  
turned on the blank screen is displayed first.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
25  
Playback Mode  
The camera switches the type of information display when you press the  
M button during playback.  
Standard  
Captured image, file format and indicators are displayed.  
1
Captured image and histogram (Brightness/RGB) are  
displayed. Not available during movie playback.  
Histogram display  
Detailed information Detailed information on how and when the image was  
display  
taken is displayed.  
No info. display  
Only captured image is displayed.  
M
1/2000 F5.6  
100-0001  
1/2000 F5.6  
100-0001  
Standard  
Histogram display  
M
M
P
AF.A  
0
M
0
0
0
0
24mm  
1/  
2000  
F2.8  
+1.5  
-0.5  
G2A1  
ISO  
200  
JPEG 12M  
AdobeRGB  
10/10/’09 10:00AM 100-0001  
No info. display  
Detailed information display  
The information that is shown first during playback is the same as that of the  
last playback in the previous session. If [Playback Info Display] is set to P (Off)  
in [Memory] (p.260) of the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu, the [Standard] screen is  
always displayed first when the camera is turned on.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
26  
 Detailed information display  
Use the four-way controller (23) to switch between pages. The copyright  
information is displayed on page 2.  
Page 1  
1
Still Picture  
1
3
4
27  
28  
P
AF.A  
6
9
0
0
0
0
0
2
5
7
8
24mm  
DR  
200  
1/  
2000  
10  
16  
20  
11 12 13 14 15  
17  
21  
18 19  
22  
F2.8  
+1.5  
-0.5  
G2A1  
ISO  
200  
JPEG 12M  
23 24 25  
29  
26  
AdobeRGB  
10/10/’09 10:00AM 100-0001  
30  
Movie  
3
4
27  
28  
P
16  
31  
F2.8  
0
2
0
0
10min10sec  
32 33  
21  
22  
17  
0
0
MONO  
G2A1  
+1.5  
ON  
11 12 13  
Movie 1.6M3:2  
23 24 25  
29  
30  
10/10/’09 10:00AM 100-0001  
2
3
2
3
Page 2  
Still Picture/Movie  
34  
35  
36  
Photographer  
A B C D E F GH IJ K L MN O P  
Q R S T U V W X Y Z  
35  
36  
34  
Copyright Holder  
A B C D E F GH IJ K L MN O P  
Q R S T U V W X Y Z  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
27  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Rotation information (p.213)  
Captured image  
19 Digital Filter (p.140)  
20 Sensitivity (p.90)  
Protect (p.219)  
21 White Balance (p.182)  
22 Adjust White Balance (p.186)  
23 File Format (p.177)  
Capture Mode (p.83)  
Focus Mode (p.112)  
1
AF point (p.117)/  
Autofocus Mode (p.144)  
24 Recorded Pixels (p.148, p.174)  
25 Quality Level (p.148, p.175)  
26 Color Space (p.187)  
7
8
9
AE Metering (p.104)  
Lens focal length  
27 Image Tone (p.194)  
28 Custom Image parameters (p.194)  
29 Shooting date/time  
10 Shutter speed  
11 Shake Reduction (p.128)  
12 Drive Mode (p.78)  
30 Folder number-File number  
13 HDR Capture (p.191)/  
Multi-exposure (p.138)/  
Cross Processing (p.196)  
31 Recording time  
33 Audio mode (p.148)  
34 Information tampering warning  
36 Copyright Holder (p.257)  
14 Highlight Correction (p.189)  
15 Shadow Correction (p.190)  
16 Aperture value  
17 EV Compensation (p.107)  
18 Flash Exposure Compensation  
* For images shot with Live View, the autofocus mode is displayed for indicator 6.  
* Indicators 7 and 18 appear only for images in which the flash was discharged.  
* Indicators 13, 14, 15, 19, and 22 appear only for images taken with the  
corresponding functions enabled.  
* Indicators 24 and 25 do not appear for RAW images.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
28  
 Histogram Display  
The following histograms can be displayed when playing back still  
pictures. The “Brightness histogram” shows the distribution of brightness  
and the “RGB histogram” shows the distribution of color intensity. Press  
the four-way controller (23) to switch between “Brightness histogram”  
and “RGB histogram”.  
1
1
23  
23  
8
9
11  
1
10  
2
1/  
1/  
2000 F5.6  
2000 F5.6  
100-0001  
100-0001  
3
4
5
6
7
3
4
5
6
7
Brightness histogram  
RGB histogram  
1
Histogram (Brightness)  
7
Folder number-File number  
Histogram (R)  
2
Switch RGB histogram/ Brightness  
histogram  
8
9
Histogram (G)  
3
4
5
6
File Format  
Shutter speed  
Aperture value  
Protect  
10 Histogram (B)  
11 Switch Brightness histogram/  
RGB histogram  
* Indicator 6 appears only for images with Protect setting.  
If [Bright/Dark Area] is set to O (On) in [Playback Display Method] of the [Q  
Playback 1] menu, areas affected by bright or dark portions blink (except when  
in RGB histogram display and Detailed information display). (p.203)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
29  
Using the Histogram  
A histogram shows the brightness  
distribution of an image. The horizontal  
axis represents brightness (dark at the  
left and bright at the right) and the  
vertical axis represents the number of  
pixels.  
1
The shape and the distribution of the  
histogram before and after shooting  
tells you whether the exposure level  
and contrast are correct or not, and lets  
you decide if you need to adjust the  
exposure and take a picture again.  
(Dark) Brightness(Bright)  
Dark portions Bright portions  
Understanding Brightness  
When the brightness is correct and there are no overly bright or dark  
areas, the graph peaks in the middle. If the image is too dark, the peak is  
on the left side, and if it is too bright, the peak is on the right side.  
Dark image  
Image with few bright  
or dark areas  
Bright image  
When the image is too dark, the part to the left is cut off (dark portions with  
no detail) and when the image is too bright, the part to the right is cut off  
(bright portions with no detail).  
Bright portions blink red and dark portions blink yellow on the monitor  
when [Bright/Dark Area] is O (On).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
30  
Understanding Color Balance  
Distribution of color intensity is displayed for each color in the RGB  
histogram. The right side of the graphs look similar for images that have  
White Balance adjusted well. If only one color is lopsided to the left, that  
color is too intense.  
1
Guide Indicators  
The following indicators appear on the monitor to indicate the keys,  
buttons and e-dial that can be operated at that time.  
Example)  
2
3
Four-way controller (2)  
Four-way controller (3)  
Four-way controller (4)  
Four-way controller (5)  
e-dial  
3 button  
4 button  
4
|
Green button  
mc button  
M button  
K/i button  
5
m
S
Shutter release button  
Viewfinder  
The following information appears in the viewfinder.  
2
1
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
31  
1
2
3
Spot metering frame (p.104)  
Flash status (p.67)  
Lit: when flash is available.  
Blinks: when flash is recommended but not set.  
1
4
Picture mode icon (p.84)  
The icon for Picture mode in use appears.  
U (Normal mode in I), = (Portrait), s (Landscape), q (Macro),  
\ (Moving Object), . (Night Scene Portrait)  
5
6
Shake Reduction (p.128)  
Appears when the Shake Reduction function is activated.  
Shutter speed  
Shutter speed when capturing or adjusting.  
Underlined when shutter speed can be adjusted with the e-dial.  
7
8
9
Aperture value  
Aperture value when capturing or adjusting.  
Underlined when aperture value can be adjusted with the e-dial.  
Focus indicator (p.62)  
Lit: when the subject is focused.  
Blinks: when the subject is not in focus.  
Number of recordable images/EV compensation value  
Displays the number of recordable images with current quality and  
recorded pixel setting.  
The difference from the proper exposure value appears when the mode dial  
is set to a. (p.101)  
m: EV Compensation (p.107)  
Underlined when EV compensation value can be adjusted with the e-  
dial while the mc button is pressed.  
o: Sensitivity  
Underlined when the sensitivity can be adjusted with the e-dial  
10 Focus mode (p.112)  
Appears when set to \.  
11 AE lock (p.108)  
Appears while the AE lock is activated.  
• [9999] is the maximum number of recordable images that can be displayed  
in the viewfinder. Even if the number of recordable images is 10000 or more,  
[9999] is displayed.  
• When [10. AF/AE-L Button] is set to [Cancel AF] in the [A Custom Setting 2]  
menu, \ is displayed in the viewfinder while the =/L button is  
pressed. (p.114)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
32  
How to Change Function Settings  
Function settings can be changed using the direct keys, the control panel  
or the menu.  
This section explains the basic ways to change function settings.  
1
Using the Direct Keys  
In Capture mode, you can set Drive Mode, Flash Mode, White Balance  
and Sensitivity by pressing the four-way controller (2345), and set AF  
point by pressing the 4 button. (p.78)  
Below, how to set the flash mode will be explained as an example.  
1
Press the four-way controller (3)  
in Capture mode.  
The [Flash Mode] screen appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (45)  
to select a flash mode.  
Flash Mode  
Auto Flash Discharge  
0.0  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Press the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
33  
Using the Control Panel  
While shooting, the current settings can be checked on the status screen.  
You can also switch the display to the control panel and change settings.  
Below, how to set the JPEG Quality will be explained as an example.  
1
1
Check the status screen and then  
press the M button.  
The control panel appears.  
Press the M button when the status  
screen is not displayed.  
AUTO  
PICT  
AF.A  
1/20  
F5.6  
AUTO  
ISO 800  
AWB  
ISO  
-3  
2
1
1
2
+3  
[
]
JPEG 12M  
37  
2
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to select an item you  
want to change the setting for.  
Custom Image  
Bright  
HDR  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
You cannot select items that cannot be  
changed.  
AF.A  
JPEG  
12M  
10/10/’09  
10:30AM  
[
]
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
34  
3
4
5
Press the 4 button.  
JPEG Quality  
The setup screen of the selected item  
appears.  
HDR  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
AF.A  
1
JPEG  
12M  
10/10/’09  
10:30AM  
[
]
37  
Use the four-way controller  
(45) or e-dial to select a setting  
value.  
128  
JPEG Quality  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Press the 4 button.  
The camera returns to the control panel and is ready to take a picture.  
• You can also change the setting by turning the e-dial after selecting the item  
you want to change in Step 2 on p.33. For detailed settings such as  
parameters, press the 4 button and then make changes.  
• The status screen and control panel are not displayed when Live View  
(p.143) is displayed. Make the settings in the [A Rec. Mode] menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
35  
Using the Menus  
This section explains operation methods for the [A Rec. Mode],  
[Q Playback], [R Set-up] and [A Custom Setting] menus.  
Below, how to set [HDR Capture] in the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu will be  
explained as an example.  
1
1
Press the 3 button in  
Capture mode.  
The [A Rec. Mode 1] menu appears on  
the monitor.  
If the 3 button is pressed in  
Playback mode, the [Q Playback 1]  
menu appears. When the mode dial is set  
to H (Scene), the [H Scene] menu  
appears instead.  
2
3
Press the four-way controller  
(5).  
1
2
3
4
Custom Image  
File Format  
JPEG Recorded Pixels  
JPEG Quality  
D-Range Setting  
Lens Correction  
JPEG  
12M  
Each time the four-way controller (5) is  
pressed, the menu will change in the  
following sequence: [A Rec. Mode 2],  
[A Rec. Mode 3], [A Rec. Mode 4],  
[Q Playback 1] ··· [A Rec. Mode 1].  
MENU  
Exit  
You can also use the e-dial to switch the  
menus.  
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to choose an item.  
1
2
4
3
OFF  
OFF  
Cross Processing  
Digital Filter  
HDR Capture  
Multi-exposure  
AF Mode  
Off  
AF.A  
AE Metering  
Select AF Point  
MENU  
Exit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
36  
4
5
6
Press the four-way controller (5).  
1
2
4
3
OFF  
OFF  
Available settings are displayed.  
Cross Processing  
Digital Filter  
HDR Capture  
Multi-exposure  
AF Mode  
The frame moves to the pop-up menu if  
there is one.  
Off  
AF.A  
1
AE Metering  
Select AF Point  
MENU  
Exit  
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select a setting.  
1
2
4
3
OFF  
OFF  
Cross Processing  
Digital Filter  
HDR Capture  
Multi-exposure  
AF Mode  
Off  
Standard  
Strong  
AE Metering  
Select AF Point  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Press the 4 button.  
The camera returns to the menu screen.  
Next, set other items.  
Press the 3 button to exit the menu  
and the screen that was displayed before  
selecting the menu appears again.  
Even after you press the 3 button and close the menu screen, your  
settings will not be saved if the camera is turned off improperly (such as by  
removing the batteries while the camera is on).  
Refer to the following pages for details on each menu item.  
• [A Rec. Mode] menu 1 p.79  
• [Q Playback] menu 1 p.201  
• [R Set-up] menu 1 p.240  
• [A Custom Setting] menu 1 p.81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Getting Started  
This chapter explains your first steps from purchasing the  
camera to taking pictures. Be sure to read it and follow the  
instructions.  
Attaching the Strap ..............................................38  
Inserting the Batteries .........................................39  
Attaching the Lens ...............................................48  
Turning the Camera On and Off ..........................51  
Initial Settings .......................................................52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
38  
Attaching the Strap  
1
Pass the end of the strap  
through the strap lug, then  
secure it on the inside of the  
clasp.  
2
2
Attach the other end of the  
strap in the same manner as  
described above.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
39  
Inserting the Batteries  
Insert batteries into the camera. Use four AA lithium batteries, AA Ni-MH  
rechargeable batteries, or AA alkaline batteries.  
This camera is packaged with AA lithium batteries for checking the camera  
functionality but other kinds of batteries are also compatible. Use the compatible  
batteries according to the intended purpose.  
2
Available Batteries  
AA lithium batteries  
Characteristics  
Provided with the camera. Recommended when using the  
camera in cold climates.  
AA Ni-MH  
rechargeable  
batteries  
These are rechargeable and are economical.  
A commercially available battery charger that is  
compatible with the batteries is required.  
These are easily obtainable when the batteries you are  
using run out but they may not support all the camera  
AA alkaline batteries functions under certain conditions. We do not recommend  
using them except in emergencies or when checking the  
camera functionality.  
• Do not use the Ni-Mn batteries as the batteries’ voltage characteristics may  
cause a malfunction.  
• AA lithium batteries and AA alkaline batteries that can be used in this camera  
are not rechargeable.  
• Do not open the battery cover or remove the batteries while the power is on.  
• Remove the batteries when you do not plan to use the camera for a long time.  
If you leave them in the camera for a long time, they may leak.  
• If the date and time settings have been reset when you insert new batteries  
after a long time has passed since the batteries were removed, follow the  
• Insert the batteries correctly. Batteries inserted incorrectly may cause a  
camera breakdown. Wipe the electrodes of the batteries before inserting.  
• Replace all the batteries at the same time and do not mix battery types,  
brands or old batteries with new ones. Otherwise, malfunctions, such as the  
battery level not being displayed properly, may occur.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
40  
1
Push and hold the battery  
cover unlock lever as shown in  
the illustration (1), slide the  
battery cover toward the lens  
(2) and then flip open.  
1
2
2
2
3
Insert the batteries according  
to the +/– indicators in the  
battery chamber.  
Press down on the batteries  
with the battery cover (3) and  
slide it as shown in the  
3
illustration (4) to close.  
4
Be sure to fully close the battery cover. The camera will not turn on if the battery  
cover is open.  
• Use the AC adapter kit K-AC84 (optional) when using the camera for a  
prolonged period. (p.42)  
• Check the orientation of the batteries if the camera does not operate properly  
after replacing the batteries.  
Battery Level Indicator  
You can confirm remaining battery level by checking the w displayed on  
the status screen.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
41  
Status Screen  
w (Green)  
Battery Level  
Batteries are full.  
f (Orange)  
z (Red)  
Batteries are running low.  
Batteries are almost empty.  
“Battery depleted”  
The camera turns off after displaying the message.  
f or z (Red) may appear even when the battery level is sufficient if the  
camera is used at low temperatures or when performing continuous shooting  
consecutively. In this situation, turn the camera off and on again. If w  
(Green) appears, you can use the camera.  
2
Approximate Image Storage Capacity and  
Playback Time (New Batteries)  
(Based on ambient operating temperature of 23 ºC)  
Flash  
Photography  
(50% Use)  
Normal  
Recording  
Playback Time  
680 minutes  
390 minutes  
350 minutes  
Batteries  
AA lithium batteries  
1900  
1100  
AA Ni-MH  
rechargeablebatteries  
(1900mAh)  
640  
210  
420  
AA alkaline batteries  
130  
The image storage capacity (normal recording and flash use 50%) is based on  
measuring conditions in accordance with CIPA standards, while other data is  
based on our measuring conditions. Some deviation from the above figures may  
occur in actual use depending on shooting mode and shooting conditions.  
• Battery performance temporarily decreases as the temperature decreases.  
When using the camera in cold climates, have extra batteries at hand and  
keep them warm in your pocket. Battery performance will return to normal  
when returned to room temperature.  
• Have extra batteries ready when traveling overseas, taking pictures in cold  
climates, or when you will be taking a lot of pictures.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
42  
Using the AC Adapter (Optional)  
We recommend using the AC adapter kit K-AC84 (optional) when using  
the monitor for a long time or when connecting the camera to a computer  
or AV device.  
1
Make sure the camera is turned off.  
2
If batteries are inserted into the camera, open the battery cover and  
remove the batteries. Refer to Step 1 on p.40.  
2
Open the battery cover and pull  
out the electric cable cover (1)  
on the right side of the battery  
chamber.  
3
4
Insert the DC coupler into the  
battery chamber.  
Pull out the DC coupler’s electric  
cable as shown in the  
illustration.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
43  
5
6
Close the battery cover.  
Refer to Step 3 on p.40.  
Connect the DC terminal on the AC adapter to the DC  
coupler.  
2
8
6
7
7
Connect the AC plug cord to the AC adapter.  
Plug the AC cord into the power outlet.  
8
• Make sure the camera is turned off before connecting or disconnecting the  
AC adapter.  
• Make sure connections are secure between the terminals. SD Memory Card  
or data may be corrupted if disconnected while the camera is recording or  
reading data.  
• Keep the electric cable cover closed when not using the AC adapter.  
Be sure to read the manual of the AC adapter kit K-AC84 when using the AC  
adapter.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
44  
Inserting/Removing the SD Memory  
Card  
This camera uses either an SD Memory Card or an SDHC Memory Card.  
(Both cards are referred to as SD Memory Cards hereafter.) Make sure the  
camera is turned off before inserting or removing the SD Memory Card  
(commercially available).  
2
• Do not remove the SD Memory Card while the card access lamp is lit.  
• Use this camera to format (initialize) an SD Memory Card that is unused or  
has been used on other cameras or digital devices. Refer to “Formatting an  
SD Memory Card” (p.242) for details on formatting.  
• Use a high-speed memory card when recording movies. If the write speed  
cannot keep up with the recording speed, the writing may stop during  
recording.  
1
Make sure that the camera is turned off.  
2
Slide the card cover in the  
direction of the arrow and then  
lift it to open (12).  
1
2
3
Insert the card all the way with  
the SD Memory Card label  
facing toward the monitor.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
45  
Push the SD Memory Card in once to  
remove.  
2
4
Close the card cover (3) and  
then slide it in the direction of  
the arrow (4).  
4
3
Precautions When Using the SD Memory Card  
• The SD Memory Card is equipped with a  
write-protect switch. Setting the switch to  
LOCK prevents new data from being  
recorded on the card, the stored data from  
being deleted, and the card from being  
formatted by the camera or computer.  
Write-protect  
switch  
• Care should be taken when removing the SD Memory Card immediately after  
using the camera because the card may be hot.  
• Do not open the card cover, remove the SD Memory Card or turn the camera  
off while images are being played back or saved to the card, or the camera is  
connected to a computer with the USB cable. Doing so may cause the data to  
be lost or the card to be damaged.  
• Do not bend the SD Memory Card or subject it to violent impact. Keep it away  
from water and store away from high temperatures.  
• Do not remove the SD Memory Card during formatting. The card may be  
damaged and become unusable.  
• Data on the SD Memory Card may be deleted in the following circumstances.  
We do not accept any liability for data that is deleted if  
(1) the SD Memory Card is mishandled by the user.  
(2) the SD Memory Card is exposed to static electricity or electrical interference.  
(3) the SD Memory Card has not been used for a long time.  
(4) the SD Memory Card is ejected or the batteries are removed while the data  
on the card is being recorded or accessed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
46  
• If the SD Memory Card is not used for a long time, the data on the card may  
become unreadable. Be sure to regularly make a backup of important data on  
a computer.  
• Avoid using or storing the card where it may be exposed to static electricity or  
electrical interference.  
• Avoid using or storing the card in direct sunlight or in locations where it may be  
exposed to rapid changes in temperature or to condensation.  
• Be sure to format SD Memory Cards that are unused or have been used on  
another camera.  
2
• Please note that formatting the SD Memory Card will not necessarily delete the  
data so that it cannot be recovered using off-the-shelf data recovery software.  
If you are going to discard, give away or sell your SD Memory Card you should  
ensure that the data on the card is completely deleted or the card itself is  
destroyed if it contains any personal or sensitive information. There are off-the-  
shelf secure data deletion software programs available that will completely  
delete the data.  
In any case, the data on your SD Memory Card should be managed at your own  
risk.  
Recorded Pixels and Quality Level  
When the File Format is JPEG  
Choose the number of recorded pixels (size) and quality level (JPEG data  
compression rate) of pictures according to how you intend to use the  
pictures you have taken.  
Pictures with larger recorded pixels or more stars (E) are clearer when  
printed. However, the number of pictures that can be taken (the number of  
pictures that can be recorded on an SD Memory Card) decreases with  
larger file sizes.  
The quality of the captured photo or printed picture depends on the quality  
level, exposure control, resolution of the printer and a variety of other  
factors so you do not need to select more than the required number of  
pixels. For example, to print in postcard size, i (1728×1152) is  
adequate. Set the appropriate recorded pixels and quality level depending  
on how the picture will be used.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
47  
 JPEG Recorded Pixels, JPEG Quality and Approximate Image  
Storage Capacity  
(When using a 1 GB SD Memory Card)  
JPEG Quality  
C
D
E
Best  
Better  
Good  
JPEG Rec. Pixels  
E
J
P
i
(4288×2848)  
138  
163  
267  
805  
244  
289  
479  
564  
(3936×2624)  
(3072×2048)  
(1728×1152)  
468  
902  
2
1373  
2518  
• The number of storable images may vary depending on the subject, shooting  
conditions, shooting mode and SD Memory Card, etc.  
When the number of storable images exceeds 500, captured images are  
divided into folders containing 500 images each. However, in Exposure  
Bracketing, images will be stored in the same folder until shooting is  
completed, even if the number of images exceeds 500.  
When the File Format is RAW  
With the a, you can record in the versatile JPEG format or the high  
quality and editable RAW format. For RAW file format, you can select  
PENTAX’s original PEF format or general-purpose DNG (Digital Negative)  
format designed by Adobe Systems. On a 1 GB SD Memory Card, you can  
record up to 48 images in both PEF and DNG formats.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
48  
Attaching the Lens  
Attach a proper lens to the camera's body.  
When you use one of the following lenses with the a, all the camera’s  
capture modes will be available.  
(a) DA, DA L, D FA, FA J lenses  
(b) Lenses with an Aperture s (Auto) position, when used in the  
s position  
2
Turn the camera off before attaching or removing the lens to prevent  
unexpected lens movement.  
• When lenses described in (b) are used in a position other than s, some  
functions will be restricted. Refer to “Notes on [22. Using Aperture Ring]”  
• With factory default settings, the camera will not work with lenses other than  
those listed above and accessories. Set [22. Using Aperture Ring] to  
[Permitted] in the [A Custom Setting 4] menu to use them. (p.284)  
1
Check that the camera is turned off.  
2
Remove the body mount cover  
(1) and lens mount cover (2).  
Be sure to put the lens down with the  
lens mount side facing upward to  
protect the lens mount from damage.  
3
Align the Lens mount index  
(red dots: 3) on the camera  
and the lens, and secure by  
turning the lens clockwise until  
it clicks.  
After attaching, turn the lens  
counterclockwise to check that the lens  
is locked in place.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
49  
4
Remove the front lens cap by  
pushing the indicated portions  
inward.  
2
To detach the lens, hold down the lens  
unlock button (4) and turn the lens  
counterclockwise.  
4
• We assume no responsibility nor liability for accidents, damages and  
malfunctions resulting from the use of lenses made by other manufacturers.  
• The camera body and lens mount incorporate lens information contacts and  
an AF coupler. Dirt, dust, or corrosion may damage the electrical system.  
When necessary, clean the contacts with a soft dry cloth.  
The body mount cover (1) is a cover to prevent scratches and block dust when  
shipped. Body Mount Cap K is sold separately and has a lock function.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
50  
Adjusting the Viewfinder Diopter  
Adjust the viewfinder diopter to suit your eyesight.  
If it is difficult to see the viewfinder image clearly, slide the diopter  
adjustment lever sideways.  
You can adjust the diopter from approximately –2.5 to +1.5 m  
–1  
.
2
1
Look through the viewfinder  
and slide the diopter  
adjustment lever left or right.  
Adjust the lever until the AF frame in  
the viewfinder is focused.  
Point the camera at a white wall or  
other bright and consistent surface.  
AF frame  
• The Eyecup FQ is attached to the viewfinder portion when the camera leaves  
the factory. Diopter adjustment is available with the Eyecup FQ attached.  
However, adjustment is easier with the eyecup removed.  
• To remove the Eyecup FQ, pull it out in the  
direction of the arrow.  
To attach the Eyecup FQ, align it with the  
groove on the viewfinder eyepiece and  
push it into position.  
• If it is difficult to see the viewfinder image  
clearly even if you use the diopter  
adjustment lever, use the optional diopter  
correction lens adapter M. However, the  
Eyecup FQ must be removed to use this  
adapter. (p.291)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
51  
Turning the Camera On and Off  
1
Turn the main switch to [ON].  
The camera will turn on.  
Set the main switch to the position  
[OFF] to turn off the camera.  
2
• Always turn the camera off when not in use.  
• The power will automatically turn off when you do not perform any operations  
within a set period of time. To reactivate the camera after it turns off  
automatically, turn it on again or perform any of the following.  
- Press the shutter release button halfway.  
- Press the Q button.  
- Press the M button.  
• By default, the camera is set to turn off automatically after 1 minute of  
inactivity. You can change the setting in [Auto Power Off] of the [R Set-up 3]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
52  
Initial Settings  
The first time the camera is turned on after  
purchasing, the [Language/u] screen  
appears on the monitor. Follow the  
procedure below to set the language  
displayed on the monitor and the current  
date and time. Once these settings are  
made, you will not need to set them again  
when you turn on your camera.  
2
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
If the [Date Adjustment] screen appears, set  
the date and time by following the procedure  
Date Adjustment  
Date Format  
Date  
24h  
mm/dd/yy  
01 / 01 / 2009  
:
Time  
00 00  
Settings complete  
Cancel  
MENU  
Setting the Display Language  
You can choose the language in which the menus, error messages, etc.  
are displayed from the following: English, French, German, Spanish,  
Portuguese, Italian, Dutch, Danish, Swedish, Finnish, Polish, Czech,  
Hungarian, Turkish, Greek, Russian, Korean, Chinese (traditional/  
simplified) and Japanese.  
1
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to select the desired  
language.  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
53  
2
Press the 4 button.  
Initial Setting  
The [Initial Setting] screen for the  
selected language appears.  
English  
New York  
Text Size  
Press the four-way controller (3) twice  
and proceed to Step 10 of p.54 if  
[Hometown] does not have to be  
changed.  
Standard  
Settings complete  
Cancel  
MENU  
2
3
4
5
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The cursor moves to W.  
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The [W Hometown] screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
(45) to select a city.  
Hometown  
New York  
DST  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
6
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The cursor moves to [DST] (daylight saving time).  
7
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O or P.  
8
Press the 4 button.  
The camera returns to the [Initial Setting] screen.  
9
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The cursor moves to [Text Size].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
54  
10 Press the four-way controller (5)  
and use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [Standard] or  
[Large].  
Initial Setting  
English  
New York  
Text Size  
Standard  
Large  
Selecting [Large] magnifies the selected  
menu item.  
Settings complete  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
2
11 Press the 4 button.  
12 Press the four-way controller (3)  
Initial Setting  
to select [Settings complete].  
English  
New York  
Text Size  
Standard  
Settings complete  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
13 Press the 4 button.  
The [Date Adjustment] screen appears.  
In this manual, the menu screens hereafter are described with [Text Size] set  
to [Standard].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
55  
When the Wrong Language is Set  
If you mistakenly select the wrong language in the [Language/u]  
screen and proceed to the [Date Adjustment] screen, you can perform  
the following operation to set the language back.  
If you have proceeded to switch the camera to Capture mode (and the  
camera is ready to take a picture), perform the following operation from  
Step 2 to set the language back.  
2
1
Press the 3 button once to  
display the guides on the  
monitor.  
ࡓ࡜
 
⥄േ㔺಴  
P
The screen shown on the right is an  
example of the guides displayed. The  
displayed screen will vary depending on  
the selected language.  
P
2009/01/01 00:00  
The guides appear on the monitor for 3  
seconds.  
2
3
Press the 3 button once.  
[A 1] is displayed in the upper tab.  
H is displayed when the mode dial is set to H.  
Press the four-way controller (5) five times.  
[R 1] is displayed in the upper tab.  
Press the four-way controller (5) six times when the mode dial is set to  
H.  
4
5
Press the four-way controller (3) to select [Language/  
u].  
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Language/u] screen appears.  
6
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select the  
desired language and press the 4 button.  
The [R Set-up 1] menu in the selected language appears.  
Refer to the following pages and set the desired city for [Hometown]  
and the current date and time as necessary.  
• To change the hometown: “Setting the World Time” (p.244)  
• To change the date and time: “Changing the Date and Time Display”  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
56  
• When the hometown and the date and time are not set, the [Initial Setting]  
screen or [Date Adjustment] screen will be displayed when the camera is  
turned on again.  
• If you have not proceeded to the [Date Adjustment] screen, you can reselect  
a language using the four-way controller (5) in the [Language/u] screen.  
Setting the Date and Time  
2
Set the current date and time and the display style.  
1
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The frame moves to [mm/dd/yy].  
2
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to choose the date format.  
Date Adjustment  
Date Format  
Date  
24h  
mm/dd/yy  
Choose [mm/dd/yy], [dd/mm/yy] or [yy/  
mm/dd].  
01 / 01 / 2009  
:
Time  
00 00  
Settings complete  
Cancel  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
3
4
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The frame moves to [24h].  
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select 24h (24-hour  
display) or 12h (12-hour display).  
Date Adjustment  
Date Format  
Date  
24h  
mm/dd/yy  
01 / 01 / 2009  
:
Time  
00 00  
Settings complete  
Cancel  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
5
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The frame returns to [Date Format].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
57  
6
7
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The frame moves to [Date].  
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The frame moves to the month.  
8
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to set the month.  
Date Adjustment  
Date Format  
Date  
2
24h  
mm/dd/yy  
Set the day and year in the same manner.  
Next, set the time.  
01 / 01 / 2009  
:
Time  
00 00  
If you select [12h] in Step 4, the setting  
switches between am and pm depending  
on the time.  
Settings complete  
Cancel  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
9
Press the four-way controller (3)  
to select [Settings complete].  
Date Adjustment  
Date Format  
Date  
24h  
mm/dd/yy  
01 / 01 / 2009  
:
Time  
00 00  
Settings complete  
Cancel  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
10 Press the 4 button.  
The camera returns to the status screen and is ready to take a picture.  
If you set the date and time with the menu operations, the screen will  
return to the [R Set-up 1] menu. In this case, press the 3 button.  
Pressing the 3 button while adjusting the date cancels the settings made  
up to that point and switches the camera to Capture mode. If the power is  
turned on when the date and time are not set, the [Date Adjustment] screen is  
displayed if the initial settings have been completed. You can also set the date  
later by menu operations. (p.244)  
• When you press the 4 button in Step 10, the camera clock is reset to 00  
seconds. To set the exact time, press the 4 button when the time signal  
(on the TV, radio, etc.) reaches 00 seconds.  
• You can change the language and date and time settings with menu  
operations. (p.244, p.247)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
58  
Memo  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Basic Operations  
This chapter explains basic operations for shooting by  
setting mode dial to I (Auto Picture) to ensure  
successful capturing.  
For information about advanced functions and settings for  
taking pictures, refer to chapter 4 and onward.  
Basic Shooting Operation ...................................60  
Using a Zoom Lens ..............................................66  
Using the Built-in Flash .......................................67  
Playing Back Pictures ..........................................74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
60  
Basic Shooting Operation  
Holding the Camera  
How you hold the camera is important when taking pictures.  
• Hold the camera firmly with both hands and keep your elbows close  
to your body.  
• Press the shutter release button gently when taking a picture.  
3
Horizontal position  
Vertical position  
• To reduce camera shake, support your body or the camera on a solid object  
such as a table, tree, or wall.  
• Although there are individual differences among photographers, the limit  
shutter speed for a handheld camera is generally 1/(focal length ×1.5). For  
example, it is 1/75 of a second for a focal length of 50 mm and 1/150 of a  
second for 100 mm. Use a tripod or the Shake Reduction function (p.128)  
when using a lower shutter speed.  
• When using a telephoto lens, a tripod that is heavier than the total weight of  
the camera and lens is recommended to avoid camera shake.  
• Do not use the Shake Reduction function when using the camera on a tripod.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
61  
Letting the Camera Choose the Optimal Settings  
The a features various capture modes, focus modes, and drive  
modes for expressing your photographic vision. This section explains how  
to take pictures by simply pressing the shutter release button.  
1
Set the mode dial to I.  
The camera will select the optimal  
capture mode for the subject.  
3
2
Set the focus mode lever to =.  
The focus mode changes to =  
(Autofocus) mode.  
When the shutter release button is  
pressed halfway in =, the lens focuses  
automatically. (p.112)  
MF  
AF  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
62  
3
4
Look through the viewfinder to  
view the subject.  
A zoom lens can be used to change the  
size of the subject in the viewfinder.  
F
M
AF  
Position the subject inside the  
AF frame and press the shutter  
release button halfway.  
3
The autofocus system operates. The  
focus indicator ] appears in the  
viewfinder when the subject comes into  
focus.  
When set to I (Auto Picture) mode,  
the optimal capture mode is automatically  
selected from U (Standard),  
= (Portrait), s (Landscape), q (Macro),  
\ (Moving Object) or . (Night Scene  
Portrait).  
The built-in flash pops up automatically  
when necessary.  
Flash  
status  
Focus indicator  
5
Press the shutter release button  
fully.  
The picture is taken.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
63  
6
Review the captured image on  
the monitor.  
The image appears for 1 second on the  
monitor shortly after capturing (Instant  
Review).  
You can magnify the image during Instant  
Review with the e-dial. (p.202)  
3
You can delete the image during Instant  
Review by pressing the K/i button.  
Delete  
• You can set the camera so that pressing the =/L button will focus  
automatically, in the same way as pressing the shutter release button  
halfway. (p.114)  
• You can preview the image on the monitor and check the composition,  
exposure, and focus before taking pictures. (p.124)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
64  
Operating the shutter release button  
The shutter release button has two working positions.  
Not pressed Pressed halfway Pressed fully  
(first position) (second position)  
Pressing it down halfway (first position) turns on the viewfinder  
indicators and the autofocus system operates. Pressing it fully  
(second position) takes a picture.  
3
• Press the shutter release button gently when taking a picture to prevent  
camera shake.  
• Practice pressing the shutter release button halfway/fully to learn  
where the first position and second position are.  
• The viewfinder indicators are displayed while the shutter release button  
is pressed halfway. The indicators are displayed for about 10 seconds  
(default setting) while the exposure metering timer is on after you take  
your finger off the button. (p.30, p.106)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
65  
Subjects that are difficult to focus on  
The autofocus mechanism is not perfect. Focusing may be difficult  
when taking pictures under the following conditions. These also apply  
to manual focusing using the focus indicator ] in the viewfinder.  
(a) Extremely low-contrast subjects such as a white wall in the  
focusing area  
(b) Subjects which do not reflect much light within the focusing  
area  
(c) Fast moving objects  
3
(d) Strongly reflected light or strong backlighting (bright  
background)  
(e) If repeating vertical or horizontal line patterns appear within  
the focusing area  
(f) Multiple subjects in the foreground and background within the  
focusing area  
If the subject cannot be focused automatically, set the focus mode  
lever to \ and use the manual focus mode to focus on the subject  
with the aid of the matte field in the viewfinder. (p.122)  
The subject may not be focused even when the ] (focus indicator) is  
displayed when (e) and (f) above apply.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
66  
Using a Zoom Lens  
Enlarge the subject (telephoto) or capture a wider area (wide angle) with  
a zoom lens. Adjust the subject to the desired size and take pictures.  
1
Turn the zoom ring to the right or  
left.  
Turn the zoom ring clockwise for  
telephoto and counterclockwise for wide  
angle.  
3
F
M
AF  
Wide Angle  
Telephoto  
• The smaller the number displayed for the focal length, the wider the angle.  
The larger the number, the more magnified the image appears.  
• Power Zoom functions (Image Size Tracking, Zoom Clip, and Auto Zoom  
Effect) are not compatible with this camera.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
67  
Using the Built-in Flash  
Use the following procedures to take pictures in low light or backlit  
conditions or when you want to use the built-in flash.  
The built-in flash is optimum at about 0.7 m to 5 m from the subject.  
Exposure will not be properly controlled and vignetting (darkening of the  
corners of the image due to a lack of light) may occur when used at a  
distance closer than 0.7 m (this distance varies slightly depending on the  
lens being used and the set sensitivity (p.160)).  
3
Compatibility of built-in flash and lens  
Vignetting may occur depending on the lens being used and the  
capture conditions. We recommend taking a test shot to check the  
compatibility.  
• When using the built-in flash, remove the lens hood before shooting.  
• The built-in flash fully discharges for lenses without a function to set  
aperture lens ring to s (Auto).  
For details on the built-in flash and instructions on how to take pictures with an  
external flash, refer to the “Using the Flash” (p.155).  
Setting the Flash Mode  
Flash Mode  
Function  
The camera automatically measures the ambient light  
and determines whether to use the flash. The flash  
pops up and discharges automatically when necessary,  
such as when using a shutter speed likely to cause  
camera shake or in backlit conditions (except when in  
s (Landscape), \ (Moving Object) or l (Night Snap)  
in H (Scene) mode). The flash may pop up but may  
not discharge if the camera determines that the flash is  
not necessary.  
Auto Flash  
Discharge  
C
Manual Flash  
Discharge  
Discharges the flash manually. Discharges when the  
flash is popped up, does not discharge when retracted.  
b
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
68  
Flash Mode  
Function  
Auto Flash+Red- Discharges a pre-flash for red-eye reduction before the  
i
eye Reduction  
Manual Flash+  
automatic flash.  
Discharges the flash manually. A pre-flash for red-eye  
D
Red-eye Reduct. reduction is discharged before the main flash.  
Sets to a slow shutter speed depending on the  
brightness. For example, when using this to shoot a  
Slow-speed Sync  
G
portrait with the sunset in the background, both the  
person and the background are captured beautifully.  
Slow-speed Sync+ Discharges a pre-flash for red-eye reduction before the  
H
Red-eye  
main flash is discharged with Slow-speed Sync.  
3
Discharges the flash immediately before closing the  
shutter curtain. Captures moving objects as if they are  
leaving a trail behind. (p.158)  
I
k
Trailing Curtain  
Sync  
You can synchronize a dedicated external flash  
(AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ) without using a sync cord.  
(p.165)  
Wireless Mode  
r
The flash modes that can be selected differ depending on the capture  
mode.  
Capture Mode  
I/=/s/q/\/./H  
e/K/c  
Selectable Flash Mode  
C/b/i/D/r  
E
/F/G/H/I/r  
b/a  
E/F/k/r  
1
Press the four-way controller (3)  
in Capture mode.  
The [Flash Mode] screen appears.  
The flash modes that can be selected for  
the set capture mode appear.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
69  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (45)  
to select a flash mode.  
Flash Mode  
Auto Flash Discharge  
Turn the e-dial to perform the flash  
exposure compensation. (p.72)  
0.0  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Press the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
3
Using Auto Flash Discharge Mode C,  
(Automatic Flash Pop-up)  
i
1
Set the mode dial to I, =, q, . or H.  
The flash is deactivated when A (Night Scene), K (Sunset), n (Stage  
Lighting), U (Candlelight) or E (Museum) is selected in H (Scene)  
mode. The built-in flash does not pop up when set to l (Night Snap) in  
H (Scene) mode.  
2
Press the shutter release button  
halfway.  
The built-in flash pops up if necessary  
and begins charging. When the flash is  
fully charged, b appears in the  
viewfinder. (p.30)  
3
Press the shutter release button fully.  
The picture is taken.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
70  
4
Push down on the portion  
indicated in the illustration to  
retract the built-in flash.  
Switch between C (Auto Flash Discharge) and b (Manual Flash Discharge)  
by pressing the K/i button while the built-in flash is popped up.  
3
Using Manual Flash Discharge Mode  
,
b D  
1
Press the K/i button.  
The built-in flash pops up and begins  
charging. The b mode is used regardless  
of the flash mode settings. When the flash  
is fully charged, b appears in the  
viewfinder. (p.30)  
2
3
Press the shutter release button fully.  
The flash discharges and the picture is taken.  
Push the built-in flash down to retract.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
71  
When the mode dial is set to a (Flash Off), the built-in flash will not pop up  
even if the K/i button is pressed.  
Using red-eye reduction flash  
“Red-eye” is the phenomenon where eyes look reddish in  
photographs taken in dark environments with a flash. This is caused  
by the reflection of the electronic flash in the retina of the eye.  
Red-eye occurs because pupils are dilated in dark environments.  
This phenomenon cannot be averted but the following measures can  
be used to combat it.  
3
• Brighten the surroundings when shooting.  
• Set to wide angle and move closer to the subject if a zoom lens  
is in use.  
• Use a flash that supports red-eye reduction.  
• Position the flash as far away from the camera as possible when  
using an external flash.  
The red-eye reduction function on this camera reduces red-eye by  
discharging the flash twice. With the red-eye reduction function, the  
pre-flash is discharged just before the shutter is released. This  
reduces pupil dilation. The main flash is then discharged while the  
pupils are smaller, reducing the red-eye effect.  
To use the red-eye reduction function in Picture mode or H (Scene)  
mode, select D or F. Set to F or H in other modes.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
72  
Daylight-Sync Shooting  
In daylight conditions, the flash will eliminate shadows when a portrait  
picture is taken with a person’s face cast in shadow. Use of the flash  
in this way is called Daylight-Sync Shooting. The b (Manual Flash  
Discharge) mode is used when shooting with Daylight-Sync  
Shooting.  
 Taking pictures  
1 Pop up the built-in flash manually and confirm that the flash  
mode is set to E. (p.70)  
2 Confirm that the flash is fully charged.  
3 Take a picture.  
3
Without Daylight-Sync  
With Daylight-Sync  
The picture may be overexposed if the background is too bright.  
Compensating Flash Output  
You can change the flash output in a range of –2.0 to +1.0. The following  
flash compensation values can be set according to the step interval set in  
[1. EV Steps] (p.108) of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu.  
Step Interval  
1/3 EV  
Flash Compensation Value  
–2.0, –1.7, –1.3, –1.0, –0.7, –0.3, 0.0, +0.3, +0.7, +1.0  
–2.0, –1.5, –1.0, –0.5, 0.0, +0.5, +1.0  
1/2 EV  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
73  
Set the flash compensation value by turning  
the e-dial in the [Flash Mode] screen.  
Pressing the | (Green) button returns the  
flash exposure compensation to the default  
value (0.0). (Available only when [Green  
Button] is assigned to the | (Green) button in  
[Green Button] of the [A Rec. Mode 4]  
menu) (p.179).)  
Flash Mode  
Manual Flash Discharge  
+0.3  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
• If the maximum flash output is exceeded when correcting to the plus (+) side,  
the compensation will not be effective.  
3
• Compensating to the minus (–) side may not affect the image if the subject is  
too close, the aperture value is small or sensitivity is high.  
• The flash compensation is also effective for external flash units which support  
P-TTL auto flash mode.  
Allowing Shooting while Charging the Flash  
You can set the camera to enable shooting  
16. Release While Charging  
while the flash is being charged.  
1
2
Off  
On  
the [A Custom Setting 3] menu (p.82).  
By default, pictures cannot be taken while the  
built-in flash is charging.  
Enables shutter release  
while the built-in  
flash is charging  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
74  
Playing Back Pictures  
Playing Back Images  
You can play back captured images with the camera.  
Use the provided “PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4” software to play back  
pictures using a computer. Refer to “Using the Provided Software” (p.268) for  
details on the software.  
3
1
Press the Q button.  
The camera enters Playback mode and  
the most recently captured image (image  
with the highest file number) is displayed  
on the monitor. (For movies, only the first  
frame is displayed on the monitor.)  
Press the M button during playback  
to switch the information display such as  
the image data for the displayed image.  
Refer to p.25 for display information  
details.  
2
Press the four-way controller  
(45).  
4: Displays the previous image.  
5: Displays the next image.  
Refer to “Playback Functions” (p.199) for details on the playback function.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
75  
Deleting a Single Image  
You can delete one image at a time.  
• Deleted images cannot be restored.  
• Protected images cannot be deleted. (p.219)  
1
Press the Q button and use the four-way controller (45)  
to select an image to delete.  
3
2
Press the K/i button.  
The delete confirmation screen appears.  
3
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select [Delete].  
100-0105  
Select a file format to delete for images  
saved in RAW+ format.  
1
Delete  
Cancel  
Deletes only the JPEG  
Delete JPEG  
image.  
OK  
OK  
Deletes only the RAW  
Delete RAW  
image.  
Delete  
Deletes images in both  
RAW+JPEG file formats.  
4
Press the 4 button.  
The image is deleted.  
When deleting multiple images at once, refer to “Deleting Multiple Images”  
(p.215).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
76  
Memo  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Shooting Functions  
This chapter describes the various basic and advanced  
shooting functions available with the a.  
Setting the Exposure ...........................................88  
Focusing .............................................................112  
Before Shooting (Preview) ................................124  
Camera Shake ....................................................128  
Taking Pictures Continuously ..........................136  
Shooting with the Live View ..............................143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
78  
How to Operate the Shooting  
Functions  
You can change capture-related settings using the direct keys, control  
panel, [A Rec. Mode] menus or [A Custom Setting] menus.  
For details on how to operate the menus, refer to “Using the Menus” (p.35).  
Direct Keys Setting Items  
Press the four-way controller (2345) or 4 button in Capture mode to  
4
set the following items.  
Key  
Item  
Drive Mode  
Flash Mode  
Function  
Page  
Selects Continuous shooting, Self-  
timer, Remote Control or Exposure  
Bracketing shooting.  
2
Sets the method of flash discharge.  
Adjusts the color balance to match the  
3
4
White Balance type of the light source illuminating the p.182  
subject.  
Sensitivity  
Sets the ISO sensitivity.  
5
Select AF Point Sets the focusing area.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
79  
Rec. Mode Menu Setting Items  
The following settings can be performed in  
the [A Rec. Mode 1-4] menus.  
Press the 3 button in Capture mode to  
display the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu.  
Menu  
Item  
Function  
Page  
Sets the image finishing tone such as color  
and contrast before shooting an image.  
Custom Image*  
File Format*  
4
Sets the file format.  
JPEG Recorded Sets the recording size of images for JPEG  
Pixels*  
shooting.  
A1  
JPEG Quality*  
Sets the image quality for JPEG shooting.  
D-Range  
Setting*  
Expands the dynamic range and prevents  
bright and dark areas from occurring.  
Corrects distortions and chromatic  
Lens Correction* aberrations of magnification occurring due to p.192  
lens properties.  
Cross  
Processing*  
Changes the hues and contrast by  
performing digital cross processing.  
Applies a digital filter effect when taking  
pictures.  
Digital Filter*  
Enables capturing images at high dynamic  
range.  
HDR Capture*  
A2  
Multi-exposure  
AF Mode*  
Sets the Multi-exposure shooting settings.  
Selects the autofocus mode.  
Selects the part of the viewfinder to use for  
measuring brightness and determining  
exposure.  
AE Metering*  
Select AF Point* Selects the part of the viewfinder to focus on. p.117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
80  
Menu  
Item  
Function  
Sets the movie settings.  
Sets the Live View display settings.  
Page  
Movie  
Live View  
Status Screen  
Instant Review  
Color Space  
Sets the status screen display color settings. p.248  
A3  
Sets the Instant Review display settings.  
Sets the color space to use.  
RAW File Format Sets the file format for RAW shooting.  
Assigns the function to be called up when the  
Green Button  
| (Green) button is pressed.  
Sets the settings to save when the power is  
turned off.  
Memory  
A4  
Shake  
Sets the Shake Reduction function.  
Reduction*  
4
Sets the focal length when using a lens for  
which focal length information cannot be  
obtained.  
Input Focal  
Length  
* Can be set using the control panel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
81  
Custom Setting Menu Setting Items  
Set the [A Custom Setting 1-4] menus to fully use the functions of a SLR  
camera.  
Menu  
Item  
Function  
Page  
1. EV Steps  
Sets the adjustment steps for exposure.  
Sets the adjustment steps for ISO  
sensitivity.  
2. Sensitivity Steps  
3. Expanded  
Sensitivity  
Expands the lower and upper sensitivity  
limits.  
4. Meter Operating  
Time  
Sets the exposure metering time.  
4
A1  
5. AE-L with AF  
Locked  
Sets whether to lock the exposure value  
when the focus is locked.  
Sets whether to link the exposure and AF  
point in the focusing area during multi-  
segment metering.  
6. Link AE to AF  
Point  
7. Auto Bracketing Sets the order for Exposure Bracketing  
Order shooting.  
8. WB When Using Sets the white balance setting when using  
Flash  
flash.  
Sets whether to adjust the tungsten light  
color tone when the white balance is set to  
9. AWB in Tungsten  
Light  
F
(Auto White Balance).  
Sets the function used when the =/L p.108  
10. AF/AE-L Button  
button is pressed.  
11. AF with Remote Sets whether to use Autofocus when  
Control  
shooting with remote control.  
While using the remote control with the  
shutter speed set to h, sets whether to  
start exposure with a press and stop it with  
another press of the release button on the p.104  
remote control unit, or to keep the shutter  
open as long as the release button on the  
remote control unit is kept pressed.  
A2  
12. Remote Control  
in Bulb  
13. Slow Shutter  
Speed NR  
Sets whether to use Noise Reduction in  
slow speed shooting.  
Sets whether to use Noise Reduction when  
shooting with a high ISO sensitivity. Select p.92  
from three levels.  
14. High-ISO NR  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                   
82  
Menu  
Item  
Function  
Page  
High-ISO NR is activated when shooting  
with a sensitivity higher than the set  
sensitivity.  
15. High-ISO NR  
Start Level  
16. Release While Sets whether to release shutter while the  
Charging  
built-in flash is charging.  
17. Flash in  
Wireless Mode  
Sets the built-in flash discharge method in  
the wireless mode.  
18. Saving Rotation Sets whether to save rotation information  
Info  
when shooting.  
A3  
19. Auto Image  
Rotation  
Sets whether to perform auto image  
rotation during playback.  
20. Power lamp  
Changes the brightness of the power lamp. p.254  
4
When set to [On], if [AF Mode] is set to  
f or l and a manual focus lens is  
attached, catch-in focus shooting is  
enabled and the shutter is released  
21. Catch-in Focus  
automatically when the subject comes into  
focus.  
Sets whether to enable shutter release  
when the lens aperture ring is set to the  
position other than s.  
22. Using Aperture  
Ring  
A4  
Reset Custom  
Functions  
Resets all the settings in the [A Custom  
Setting 1-4] menus to the defaults.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
83  
Selecting the Appropriate Capture  
Mode  
You can switch the capture modes by setting the icons on the mode dial  
to the dial indicator.  
4
Dial indicator  
The a features various shooting modes, enabling you to take pictures  
with settings suited for your photographic vision.  
In this manual, the capture modes are referred to as follows.  
Capture Mode  
Picture mode  
Mode  
Page  
I (Auto Picture)/ = (Portrait)/ s (Landscape)/  
q (Macro)/ \ (Moving Object)/ . (Night Scene  
Portrait)/ a (Flash Off) (When shooting with Live  
View, d (Blue Sky) and K (Sunset) can also be  
selected.)  
A (Night Scene)/ Q (Surf & Snow)/ K (Food)/  
K (Sunset)/ n (Stage Lighting)/ R (Kids)/ Y (Pet)/ p.85  
U (Candlelight)/ E (Museum)/ l (Night Snap)  
H (Scene)  
mode  
e (Program)/ K (Sensitivity Priority)/ b (Shutter  
Exposure mode  
Movie mode  
Priority)/ c (Aperture Priority)/ a (Manual)  
C (Movie)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
84  
Picture Mode  
Set the mode dial to =, s, q, \, . or a if you cannot capture the  
desired image in I (Auto Picture) mode.  
The characteristics of each mode are as follows.  
Mode  
Characteristics  
The optimal capture mode is automatically selected  
from the U (Standard), = (Portrait), s (Landscape),  
q (Macro), \ (Moving Object) and . (Night Scene  
Portrait) modes. When shooting with Live View, d  
(Blue Sky) and K (Sunset) can also be selected.  
I
Auto Picture  
Optimal for capturing portraits. Reproduces a healthy  
and bright skin tone.  
Portrait  
=
s
q
4
Deepens the focus range, emphasizes contour and  
saturation of trees and the sky, and produces a  
vibrant image.  
Landscape  
Macro  
Lets you take vibrant pictures of flowers and other  
small subjects at short distances.  
Lets you take sharp pictures of a quickly moving  
subject, such as at sporting events. The drive mode  
is fixed to g (Continuous Shooting (Hi)).  
Moving Object  
\
Night Scene  
Portrait  
Lets you capture people against a night view or at dusk.  
.
The flash is deactivated. Other settings are the same  
as U (Standard) in I.  
Flash Off  
a
In ., even though the flash is used, the camera will use slow shutter speeds  
so the background areas beyond the flash’s reach will also appear correctly  
exposed in the picture (1 Slow-speed Sync (p.156)). To prevent camera  
shake, either use the Shake Reduction function or mount the camera on a  
tripod.  
When \ is automatically selected in I, pictures are taken in the drive  
mode set beforehand.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
85  
H Mode  
By setting the mode dial to H (Scene), you can choose from the  
following 10 shooting scenes.  
Mode  
Characteristics  
Used for night scenes. Use a tripod, etc. to prevent  
shaking.  
A
Q
K
Night Scene  
For capturing images of dazzling backgrounds, such  
as snowy mountains.  
Surf & Snow  
Food  
For capturing images of food. Saturation will be rather  
high to make it look appetizing.  
K Sunset  
For capturing sunrise or sunset in beautiful colors.  
For capturing moving subjects in poorly lit place.  
4
n
Stage Lighting  
For capturing moving kids. Reproduces healthy and  
bright skin tone. The drive mode is fixed to g  
(Continuous Shooting (Hi)).  
R
Kids  
For capturing moving pets. The drive mode is fixed to  
g (Continuous Shooting (Hi)).  
Y
U
E
l
Pet  
Candlelight  
Museum  
Night Snap  
For capturing scenes in candlelight.  
For capturing images in places where a flash is  
prohibited.  
For taking snapshots in poorly lit place.  
The flash is deactivated in A, K, n, U, and E. To prevent camera shake,  
either use the Shake Reduction function or mount the camera on a tripod.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
86  
Selecting a Shooting Scene  
1
Set the mode dial to H.  
The scene mode status screen appears.  
2
3
4
5
Press the M button.  
AF.A  
The icon for the currently selected  
shooting scene appears in the control  
panel.  
1/15  
ISO1600  
F4.0  
AUTO  
AWB  
ISO  
-3  
2
1
1
2
+3  
4
[
]
JPEG 12M  
123  
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to select [Scene  
Mode] and press the 4  
button.  
Scene Mode  
Night Scene  
HDR  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
AF.A  
The scene mode selection screen  
appears.  
JPEG  
12M  
10/10/’09  
10:30AM  
[
]
37  
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) or e-dial to choose a  
scene mode.  
SCN  
Night Scene  
Used for night scenes.  
Use a tripod, etc. to  
prevent shaking  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Press the 4 button.  
The camera returns to the control panel and is ready to take a picture.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
87  
When the 3 button is pressed while  
the mode dial is set to H (Scene), the [H  
Scene] menu appears. The scene mode can  
also be selected from the [H Scene]  
menu.  
Night Scene  
Used for night scenes.  
Use a tripod, etc. to  
prevent shaking  
MENU  
Exit  
Exposure Mode  
Use the exposure modes to change the sensitivity, shutter speed and  
aperture and take pictures according to your own photographic vision.  
4
Page  
Mode  
Characteristics  
Automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture  
value to obtain the proper exposure according to  
Program line when taking pictures.  
e
Program  
Automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture  
value to obtain the proper exposure according to  
the set sensitivity.  
Sensitivity  
Priority  
K
Lets you set the desired shutter speed to freeze or  
emphasize subject movement. Take pictures of  
fast moving subjects that look still or subjects that  
give a sense of movement.  
b
Shutter Priority  
Lets you set the desired aperture value for  
controlling the depth of field. Use it to obtain a  
blurred or sharp background.  
Aperture  
Priority  
c
a
Lets you set the shutter speed and aperture value  
to capture the picture with creative intent.  
Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
88  
Setting the Exposure  
Effect of Aperture and Shutter Speed  
Correct exposure of the subject is determined by the combination of  
shutter speed and aperture setting. There are many correct combinations  
of shutter speed and aperture value for a particular subject. Different  
combinations produce different effects.  
Effect of Shutter Speed  
4
By changing the shutter speed, you can manipulate how time is expressed  
in the pictures you create. Unlike with your own naked eyes, in a picture  
you can capture a fraction of a moment or a whole period of time, creating  
different effects.  
Use the b (Shutter Priority) mode.  
 Using slower shutter speed  
If the subject is moving, the image will be  
blurred because the shutter is open longer.  
It is possible to enhance the effect of  
motion (rivers, waterfalls, waves, etc.) by  
intentionally using a slower shutter speed.  
 Using faster shutter speed  
Choosing a faster shutter speed will allow  
freezing the action of a moving subject.  
A faster shutter speed also helps to  
prevent camera shake.  
Effect of Aperture  
By changing the aperture, you can control the depth of the area that  
appears in focus in the picture (the depth of field). By either narrowing the  
focus to emphasize a single point or giving depth to your picture instead  
you can completely change the feel of the picture you create.  
Use the c (Aperture Priority) mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
89  
 Opening the aperture (reduce the aperture value)  
Objects closer and farther than the focused  
subject will be more out of focus. For  
instance, if you take a picture of a flower  
against a landscape with the aperture open,  
the landscape in front and behind the flower  
will be blurred, emphasizing only the flower.  
 Closing the aperture (increase the aperture value)  
The range in focus expands forward and  
backward. For instance, if you take a picture  
of a flower against a landscape with the  
aperture narrowed, the landscape in front  
and behind the flower will be in focus.  
4
Aperture and Depth of Field  
The following table summarizes how the aperture affects the depth of  
field.  
The depth of field may also change depending on the lens used and  
the distance to the subject.  
Open  
(Smaller value)  
Close  
(Larger value)  
Aperture  
Depth of field  
Area of focus  
Shallow  
Narrow  
Deep  
Wide  
Longer  
(Telephoto)  
Shorter  
(Wide-angle)  
Lens focal length  
Distance to the subject  
Near  
Far  
• The depth of field for the a differs depending on the lens but  
compared to a 35 mm camera, the value is roughly one aperture  
setting lower (the focused range becomes narrower).  
• The wider the wide-angle lens, and the farther away the subject,  
the deeper the depth of field is (some zoom lenses do not have a  
scale for depth of field because of their designs).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
90  
Setting the Sensitivity  
You can set the sensitivity to suit the brightness of the surroundings.  
The sensitivity can be set to [AUTO] or within a sensitivity range equivalent  
to ISO 200 to 6400. The default setting is [AUTO].  
1
Press the four-way controller (5) in Capture mode.  
The [Sensitivity] screen appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select [AUTO Setting] or [Fixed  
Sensitivity  
AUTO Setting  
Value].  
4
ISO  
200  
1600  
AUTO  
ISO  
200  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
3
4
Use the four-way controller (45) to change the ISO  
sensitivity.  
For ISO AUTO, change the maximum sensitivity.  
Press the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
91  
• When n (Stage Lighting)/l (Night Snap) in H (Scene) mode or C  
(Movie) mode is selected, the sensitivity is fixed to AUTO and cannot be  
changed.  
• When the mode dial is set to K (Sensitivity Priority) or a (Manual), [AUTO  
Setting] is not displayed.  
• The sensitivity range can be expanded to a range of ISO 100 to 12800 when  
[3. Expanded Sensitivity] in the [A Custom Setting 1] menu (p.81) is set to  
[On]. In this case, the following restrictions apply.  
- When the sensitivity is set to ISO 100, bright areas are more likely to occur.  
- When [Highlight Correction] is set to [On] (p.189), the minimum sensitivity  
is ISO 200.  
• Captured images may show more noise if a higher sensitivity is set. You can  
reduce image noise by setting [14. High-ISO NR] in the [A Custom Setting 2]  
menu. (p.92)  
• You can set whether to lock the sensitivity adjustment to increments of 1 EV  
or to coordinate it with the EV steps (p.108) in [2. Sensitivity Steps] of the  
[A Custom Setting 1] menu (p.81).  
4
Expanding the Dynamic Range  
Dynamic range is the ratio that indicates the light level expressed by the  
CMOS sensor pixels from bright areas to dark areas. The larger it is, the  
better the whole range from dark to bright areas will appear in the picture.  
By expanding the dynamic range, you can expand the light level  
expressed by the CMOS sensor pixels, making it more difficult for bright  
area to occur in the image.  
To expand the dynamic range, make the settings in [D-Range Setting] of  
the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu. (p.189)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
92  
Noise Reduction  
When shooting with a digital camera, image noise (image roughness  
or unevenness) becomes noticeable in the following situations.  
- Shooting with a long exposure  
- Shooting with a high sensitivity setting  
- When the temperature of the CMOS sensor is high  
You can reduce image noise by using Noise Reduction. However,  
images shot with Noise Reduction will take longer to save.  
 Slow Shutter Speed NR  
Reduces noise during long exposures.  
Select [On] or [Off] in [13. Slow Shutter Speed NR] of the [A Custom  
Setting 2] menu (p.81).  
4
The camera determines the conditions such as the shutter speed,  
1
2
On sensitivity, and internal temperature, and automatically reduces  
noise as necessary.  
Reduces noise only when the shutter remains open for more than  
Off  
30 seconds.  
* When the exposure time is longer than 30 seconds, the maximum sensitivity is  
set to ISO 3200 and Noise Reduction is automatically activated.  
 High-ISO NR  
Reduces noise at high sensitivity (ISO) settings.  
Select [Medium], [Low], [High] or [Off] in [14. High-ISO NR] of the  
[A Custom Setting 2] menu (p.81). You can change the sensitivity  
from when Noise Reduction is activated in [15. High-ISO NR Start  
Level] of the [A Custom Setting 3] menu (p.82).  
Noise Reduction is activated when the sensitivity is higher  
than ISO 800. (default setting)  
1 ISO 800  
Noise Reduction is activated when the sensitivity is higher  
than ISO 400.  
2 ISO 400  
Noise Reduction is activated when the sensitivity is higher  
than ISO 1600.  
3 ISO 1600  
Noise Reduction is activated when the sensitivity is higher  
than ISO 3200.  
4 ISO 3200  
* When the sensitivity is set to ISO 6400 or higher, Noise Reduction is  
automatically activated.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
93  
Changing the Exposure Mode  
This camera features the following five exposure modes. Use the mode  
dial to change the exposure mode. (p.83)  
The settings available for each exposure mode are as follows.  
Change Change Change  
Shutter Aperture Sensi- Page  
Exposure  
Mode  
EV Com-  
pensation  
Description  
Speed  
Value  
tivity  
Automatically sets  
the shutter speed  
and aperture value  
to obtain the  
e
z
#*  
#*  
z
Program proper exposure  
according to  
4
Program line when  
taking pictures.  
Automatically sets  
the shutter speed  
and aperture value  
K
Other  
than  
Sensitivity to obtain the  
z
×
×
Priority  
proper exposure  
according to the  
set sensitivity.  
AUTO  
Lets you set the  
desired shutter  
speed for  
expressingmoving  
subjects.  
b
Shutter  
Priority  
z
z
z
×
z
z
Lets you set the  
aperture value for  
controlling the  
depth of field.  
c
Aperture  
Priority  
×
z
Lets you set the  
shutter speed and  
aperture value to  
capture the picture  
with creative  
Other  
than  
AUTO  
a
Manual  
×
z
z
intent.  
* In [Green Button] of the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu, you can make the setting so that the  
shutter speed and/or aperture value can be changed by turning the e-dial. (p.95)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
94  
Using a Lens with an Aperture Ring  
When using a lens with an aperture  
ring, set the aperture to the s (AUTO)  
position while holding down the auto-  
lock button on the lens.  
4
Using the e (Program) Mode  
Automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture value to obtain the  
proper exposure according to Program line when taking pictures.  
You can also use the e-dial to change the shutter speed and aperture  
value while maintaining the proper exposure (p.95).  
1
Set the mode dial to e.  
2
Turn the e-dial while pressing  
the mc button to adjust the  
exposure.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
95  
The EV compensation value is  
displayed in the status screen and  
viewfinder.  
AF.A  
P
1/125  
ISO 200  
F5.6  
AUTO  
AWB  
ISO  
-3  
2
1
1
2
+3  
[
]
JPEG 12M  
37  
EV compensation value  
• EV compensation value can be set in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV. Set the  
exposure steps in [1. EV Steps] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu. (p.108)  
• The proper exposure may not be obtained with the selected shutter speed  
and aperture value when the sensitivity is not set to [AUTO] (p.90).  
4
e-dial in Program  
You can set the action for the e-dial when  
Green Button  
P SHIFT  
turned in  
the [ Rec. Mode 4] menu. (This  
operation is available only when [Green  
e
mode. Set in [Green Button] of  
Green Button  
Tv  
A
Action in M Mode  
e-dial in Program  
Av  
OFF  
Button] is assigned to the  
button.) (p.179)  
|
(Green)  
Shifts combination of the  
aperture and shutter speed  
to obtain proper exposure  
If the  
|
(Green) button is pressed after  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
turning the e-dial, the camera returns to  
e
mode.  
Automatically adjusts the shutter speed and aperture value to  
obtain the proper exposure (Program shift). (default setting)  
P SHIFT  
b
c
Sets the shutter speed.  
Sets the aperture value.  
Disables the e-dial operation when Program Automatic  
Exposure is set.  
OFF  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
96  
Using the K (Sensitivity Priority) Mode  
You can set the sensitivity to suit the brightness of the subject.  
The shutter speed and aperture value are automatically set according to  
the selected sensitivity to obtain the proper exposure.  
1
Set the mode dial to K.  
4
2
Turn the e-dial to adjust the  
sensitivity.  
The set values are displayed in the  
status screen and viewfinder.  
AF.A  
Sv  
1/30  
ISO200  
F4.5  
AWB  
ISO  
-3  
2
1
1
2
+3  
[
]
JPEG 12M  
37  
• You can set the sensitivity to values equivalent to ISO 200 to 6400. [AUTO]  
is not available.  
• Turn the e-dial while pressing the mc button to change the EV  
compensation value. (p.107)  
• The sensitivity can be set in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV. Set the exposure  
steps in [1. EV Steps] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu. (p.108)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
97  
Using the b (Shutter Priority) Mode  
Lets you set the desired shutter speed for expressing moving subjects.  
When taking pictures of a fast moving subject, you can increase the  
shutter speed to make the subject look still or decrease the shutter speed  
to have the subject show movement.  
The aperture value is automatically set to give the proper exposure  
depending on the shutter speed.  
1
Set the mode dial to b.  
4
2
Turn the e-dial to adjust the  
shutter speed.  
The shutter speed can be set within the  
range of 1/6000 to 30 seconds.  
The set values are displayed in the  
status screen and viewfinder.  
AF.A  
Tv  
1/125  
ISO 400  
F5.6  
AUTO  
AWB  
ISO  
-3  
2
1
1
2
+3  
[
]
JPEG 12M  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
98  
• Turn the e-dial while pressing the mc button to change the EV  
compensation value. (p.107)  
• The shutter speed can be set in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV. Set the  
exposure steps in [1. EV Steps] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu. (p.108)  
• The proper exposure may not be obtained with the selected shutter speed  
when the sensitivity is not set to [AUTO] (p.90).  
Exposure Warning  
If the subject is too bright or too dark,  
the aperture value will blink in the status  
screen and viewfinder. If the subject is  
too bright, choose a faster shutter  
speed. If it is too dark, choose a slower shutter speed. When the  
aperture value indication stops blinking, you can take a picture with  
proper exposure.  
4
Use a commercially available ND (Neutral Density) Filter (p.305) if the  
subject is too bright. Use a flash if it is too dark.  
Using the c (Aperture Priority) Mode  
Set the aperture value for controlling the depth of field. The depth of field  
is deeper and the front and back of the focused object is clear when the  
aperture is set to a large value. The depth of field is shallower and the front  
and back of the focused object is blurred when the aperture is set to a  
small value.  
The shutter speed is automatically set to the proper exposure depending  
on the aperture value.  
1
Set the mode dial to c.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
99  
2
Turn the e-dial to adjust the  
aperture value.  
The set values are displayed in the  
status screen and viewfinder.  
AF.A  
Av  
1/30  
ISO 400  
F4.5  
AUTO  
AWB  
ISO  
-3  
2
1
1
2
+3  
4
[
]
JPEG 12M  
37  
• Turn the e-dial while pressing the mcbutton to change the EV  
compensation value. (p.107)  
• The aperture value can be set in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV. Set the  
exposure steps in [1. EV Steps] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu. (p.108)  
• The proper exposure may not be obtained with the selected aperture value  
when the sensitivity is not set to [AUTO] (p.90).  
Exposure Warning  
If the subject is too bright or too dark,  
the shutter speed will blink in the status  
screen and viewfinder. When the  
subject is too bright, set the aperture smaller (larger number), and  
when too dark, open the aperture further (smaller number). Once  
blinking stops, you can take a picture with proper exposure.  
Use a commercially available ND (Neutral Density) Filter (p.305) if the  
subject is too bright. Use a flash if it is too dark.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
100  
Using the a(Manual) Mode  
You can set the shutter speed and aperture value. This mode is suitable  
to take pictures of your choice by combining them. This mode is  
convenient for taking pictures using the same combination of the shutter  
speed and aperture settings or taking intentionally underexposed (darker)  
or overexposed (brighter) photographs.  
1
Set the mode dial to a.  
4
2
3
Turn the e-dial to adjust the  
shutter speed.  
The shutter speed can be set within the  
range of 1/6000 to 30 seconds.  
Turn the e-dial while pressing  
the mcbutton to adjust the  
aperture value.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
101  
The set values are displayed in the status  
screen and viewfinder.  
AF.A  
M
1/125  
ISO 200  
F5.6  
On the status screen, the e-dial indicator  
appears next to the shutter speed or  
aperture value, depending on which is  
being adjusted.  
AWB  
ISO  
-3  
2
1
1
2
+3  
[
]
JPEG 12M  
37  
Of the shutter speed and aperture value,  
the value being adjusted is underlined in  
the viewfinder.  
Difference from the  
proper exposure  
While adjusting the shutter speed or  
aperture value, the difference from the  
proper exposure (EV value) appears in  
the viewfinder. The proper exposure is  
set when [0.0] is displayed.  
4
• When the sensitivity is set to [AUTO] and the mode dial is set to a, the  
sensitivity is set to the last set value.  
• The shutter speed and aperture value can be set in increments of 1/3 EV or  
1/2 EV. Set the exposure steps in [1. EV Steps] of the [A Custom Setting 1]  
• The aperture value can also be changed by pressing the mcbutton once,  
taking your finger off the button and turning the e-dial. In this case, the  
aperture value is set when the mcbutton is pressed again or the exposure  
metering timer (p.106) elapses.  
Exposure Warning  
While adjusting the shutter speed or  
aperture value, the EV compensation  
value blinks in the viewfinder when the  
difference from the proper exposure  
becomes ±3.0 or larger.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
102  
Using AE Lock  
If [10. AF/AE-L Button] in the [A Custom Setting 2] menu is set to [AE  
Lock], you can press the =/L button to lock the exposure  
value. (p.108)  
Example) If the shutter speed is 1/125 sec. and aperture is F5.6 and  
these settings are locked with the =/L button, the  
aperture automatically changes to F11 if the shutter speed  
is changed to 1/30 sec. with the e-dial.  
Action in aMode  
4
You can set the function of the |  
Green Button  
P LINE  
(Green) button when the camera is set to  
amode. Set in [Green Button] of the  
[ARec. Mode 4] menu. (This operation  
is available only when [Green Button] is  
assigned to the | (Green) button.  
(p.179))  
Green Button  
TvSHIFT  
Action in M Mode  
e-dial in Program  
AvSHIFT  
OFF  
Sets the aperture and  
shutter speed to the  
Program Line exposure  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Adjusts the aperture value and shutter speed to obtain the  
P LINE proper exposure according to the Program Line. (default  
setting)  
Adjusts the shutter speed while the aperture value remains  
Tv SHIFT  
fixed to obtain the proper exposure.  
Adjusts the aperture value while the shutter speed remains  
Av SHIFT  
fixed to obtain the proper exposure.  
Disables the | button operation when the mode dial is set to  
a.  
OFF  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
103  
Using the Bulb Shooting  
This setting is useful when shooting night scenes and fireworks which  
require the long exposures.  
1
Set the mode dial to a.  
4
2
3
Turn the e-dial and set the shutter  
speed to h.  
AF.A  
M
Bulb  
ISO 200  
F5.6  
h appears after the slowest shutter  
speed (30 sec.).  
AWB  
ISO  
-3  
2
1
1
2
+3  
[
]
JPEG 12M  
37  
Press the shutter release button.  
The shutter remains open as long as the shutter release button is kept  
pressed.  
EV Compensation, Continuous Shooting and Exposure Bracketing are not  
available in Bulb shooting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
104  
• Turn the e-dial while holding down the mcbutton to adjust the aperture  
value. (p.107)  
• The aperture value can be set in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV. Set the  
exposure steps in [1. EV Steps] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu. (p.108)  
• The Shake Reduction function is automatically turned off during Bulb  
shooting.  
• Use a sturdy tripod to prevent camera shake during Bulb shooting.  
• To operate the shutter release button of the remote control, set in [12.  
Remote Control in Bulb] of the [A Custom Setting 2] menu. (p.81)  
• You can reduce image noise (image roughness or unevenness) caused by  
the slow shutter speed. Set in [13. Slow Shutter Speed NR] of the [A Custom  
Setting 2] menu. (p.92)  
• When the sensitivity is set to [AUTO] and the shutter speed is set to h,  
the sensitivity is set to the last set value.  
• The upper sensitivity limit for Bulb shooting is ISO 1600.  
• There is no limit on exposure time for Bulb shooting. However, we  
recommend using the AC adapter kit K-AC84 (optional) when shooting with  
a long exposure setting as the batteries are used while the shutter remains  
open. (p.42)  
4
Selecting the Metering Method  
Choose the part of the screen to use for measuring brightness and  
determining exposure. The following three methods are available.  
Segments the viewfinder in 16 parts, meters each portion  
and determines the proper exposure. (default setting)  
Multi-segment  
L
M
N
Center-  
weighted  
Measures the entire viewfinder with an emphasis on the  
center and determines the exposure.  
Measures only a spot in the center of the viewfinder and  
determines exposure.  
Spot  
1
Press the M button in the status screen.  
The control panel appears.  
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
105  
2
3
4
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to select [AE Metering]  
and press the 4 button.  
AE Metering  
Multi-segment  
HDR  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
The [AE Metering] screen appears.  
AF.A  
JPEG  
12M  
10/10/’09  
10:30AM  
[
]
37  
Use the four-way controller (45)  
to select a metering method.  
AE Metering  
Multi-segment  
4
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Press the 4 button.  
The camera returns to the control panel.  
You can also change the setting from the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu.  
Using the Multi-segment Metering  
The scene in the viewfinder is metered in  
16 different zones as shown in the  
illustration when using the multi-segment  
metering. Even in backlit locations, this  
mode automatically determines what level  
of brightness is in which portion and  
automatically adjusts exposure.  
Multi-segment metering method is not available when using a lens other than  
a DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, FA, F or A lens, or when the lens aperture ring is set  
to the position other than s.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
106  
Linking AE to AF Point during Multi-segment  
Metering  
In [6. Link AE to AF Point] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu (p.81),  
you can link the exposure and AF point in the focusing area during  
multi-segment metering.  
Off Exposure is set separately from the AF point. (default setting)  
On Exposure is set in accordance with the AF point.  
1
2
Using the Center-Weighted Metering  
4
Metering is weighted at the center of the  
viewfinder. Use this metering when you want  
to compensate the exposure by experience,  
instead of leaving it to the camera. The  
illustration shows that sensitivity increases  
as the pattern height increases (center).  
This mode does not automatically  
compensate for backlit scenes.  
Using the Spot Metering  
With spot metering, brightness is measured  
only within a limited area at the center of the  
viewfinder as shown in the illustration. You  
can use this in combination with the AE lock  
(p.108) when the subject is extremely small  
and the correct exposure is difficult to obtain.  
Setting the Meter Operating Time  
You can set the exposure metering time to [10 sec.] (default setting),  
[3 sec.] or [30 sec.] in [4. Meter Operating Time] of the [A Custom  
Setting 1] menu (p.81).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
107  
Adjusting the Exposure  
This allows you to deliberately overexpose (brighten) or underexpose  
(darken) your picture.  
The exposure steps can be selected from 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV in [1. EV Steps]  
of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu.  
You can adjust the EV compensation from –3 to +3 (EV).  
mc button  
1
Turn the e-dial while pressing  
the mcbutton.  
The exposure is adjusted.  
4
m is displayed in the status screen and  
viewfinder during compensation.  
AF.A  
Av  
1/30  
ISO 400  
F4.5  
AUTO  
AWB  
ISO  
-3  
2
1
1
2
+3  
[
]
JPEG 12M  
37  
Compensation value  
• EV compensation is not available when the mode dial is set to a(Manual).  
• The EV compensation is not canceled by turning the camera off or by setting  
any other capture mode.  
• If [Green Button] is assigned to the | (Green) button in [Green Button] of the  
[ARec. Mode 4] menu (p.179), the compensation value is reset to 0.0 when  
the | button is pressed.  
• EV compensation can also be changed by pressing the mcbutton once,  
taking your finger off the button and turning the e-dial. In this case, EV  
compensation is set when the mcbutton is pressed again or the exposure  
metering timer (p.106) elapses.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
108  
Changing the Exposure Steps  
Set the exposure setting steps in [1. EV  
Steps] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu  
(p.81) to increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV.  
1. EV Steps  
1
2
1/3 EV Steps  
1/2 EV Steps  
Exposure compensation steps  
now set to 1/3 EV  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Step Interval  
1/3 EV  
Exposure Setting Value  
±0.3, ±0.7, ±1.0, ±1.3, ±1.7, ±2.0, ±2.3, ±2.7, ±3.0  
±0.5, ±1.0, ±1.5, ±2.0, ±2.5, ±3.0  
1/2 EV  
4
Locking the Exposure Before Shooting (AE Lock)  
AE Lock is a function that locks the exposure prior to taking a picture. Use  
this when the subject is too small or is backlit and a proper exposure  
setting cannot be obtained.  
1
Select [AE Lock] in [10. AF/AE-  
L Button] of the [A Custom  
Setting 2] menu.  
10. AF/AE-L Button  
1
2
3
4
Enable AF1  
Enable AF2  
Cancel AF  
AE Lock  
Locks the exposure value  
when the AF/AE-L button  
is pressed  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
2
Press the =/L button.  
The camera locks the exposure  
(brightness) at that instant.  
@ is displayed in the status screen and  
viewfinder while the AE lock is  
engaged.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
109  
• The exposure remains locked as long as the =/L button is kept  
pressed or the shutter release button is kept pressed halfway. The exposure  
remains in the memory for a period between 0.5× to 2× the metering timer  
(p.106) even after taking your finger off the =/L button.  
• You will hear a beep when the =/L button is pressed. The beep can  
be turned off. (p.243)  
• AE lock is not available when the shutter speed is set to h.  
• When any of the following operations are performed, AE lock is canceled.  
- The =/L button is pressed again  
- The Q button, 3 button or M button is pressed  
- The mode dial is turned  
- The lens is changed  
- The lens with an aperture s(Auto) position is set to other than the s  
position  
• The combination of shutter speed and aperture value changes depending on  
the zooming position even while the AE lock is engaged when using a zoom  
lens for which the maximum aperture varies depending on the focal length.  
However, the exposure value does not change and the picture is taken at the  
brightness level set when the AE lock is activated.  
4
• The exposure can be locked when the focus is locked. Set in [5. AE-L with  
AF Locked] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu. (p.120)  
Changing the Exposure Automatically when Shooting  
(Exposure Bracketing)  
You can take three pictures continuously with different exposure when the  
shutter release button is pressed. The first frame is exposed with no  
compensation, the second frame is underexposed (negative  
compensation) and the third frame is overexposed (positive  
compensation).  
Normal exposure  
Underexposure  
Overexposure  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
110  
You can set [7. Auto Bracketing Order] in the [A Custom Setting 1] menu  
(p.81).  
1
2
3
4
0 - +  
- 0 +  
+ 0 -  
0 + -  
Standard ´ Underexposed ´ Overexposed (default setting)  
Underexposed ´ Standard ´ Overexposed  
Overexposed ´ Standard ´ Underexposed  
Standard ´ Overexposed ´ Underexposed  
1
Press the four-way controller (2) in Capture mode.  
The [Drive Mode] screen appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller  
(45) to select l (Exposure  
Drive Mode  
Exposure Bracketing  
4
Bracketing).  
3
2
1
1
2
3
0.5EV  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
3
Turn the e-dial to set the EV compensation value.  
The following bracket values can be set according to the step interval set  
in [1. EV Steps] (p.108) of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu.  
Step Interval  
1/3 EV  
Bracket Value  
±0.3, ±0.7, ±1.0, ±1.3, ±1.7, ±2.0, ±2.3, ±2.7, ±3.0  
±0.5, ±1.0, ±1.5, ±2.0, ±2.5, ±3.0  
1/2 EV  
4
5
Press the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
Press the shutter release button halfway.  
The focus indicator ]appears in the viewfinder, and EV compensation  
value appears in the status screen and viewfinder when focused.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
111  
6
Press the shutter release button fully.  
Continue to press the shutter release button until three shots have been  
captured.  
Three consecutive images will be taken according to the order set in  
[7. Auto Bracketing Order] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu.  
• Exposure Bracketing is not available in \ (Moving Object) of Picture mode,  
and R (Kids) or Y (Pet) of H (Scene) mode.  
• Exposure Bracketing is not available when the shutter speed is set to h.  
• Exposure Bracketing and Multi-exposure cannot be used at the same time.  
The mode set last is used.  
• When [AF Mode] is set to l(Single mode), the focus is locked in the first  
frame position and is used for subsequent frames.  
• When you take your finger off the shutter release button during Exposure  
Bracketing, the exposure setting will remain effective for twice as much time  
as the exposure metering timer (default setting is approx. 20 seconds)  
(p.106) and you can take a picture at the next compensation value. In this  
case, auto focusing works for each frame. After about twice as much time as  
the exposure metering timer elapses, the camera returns to settings for  
taking the first picture.  
4
• You can combine Exposure Bracketing with the built-in flash or an external  
flash (P-TTL auto only) to change only the flash output continuously.  
However, when using an external flash, holding the shutter release button  
down to take three continuous frames may cause the second and third frame  
to be taken before the flash is fully charged. Always take one frame at a time  
after confirming that charging is complete.  
Taking only overexposed or underexposed pictures  
You can use Exposure Bracketing mode for only underexposure or  
overexposure shots by combining it with EV Compensation (p.107).  
Exposure Bracketing is performed in both cases on the basis of the  
specified EV compensation value (up to ±3 EV).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
112  
Focusing  
You can focus with the following methods.  
The camera automatically focuses on the subject  
when the shutter release button is pressed halfway.  
Autofocus  
=
Manual focus  
Manually adjust the focus.  
\
Using the Autofocus  
You can also choose the autofocus mode from l(Single mode) where  
the shutter release button is pressed halfway to focus on the subject and  
the focus is locked at that position, k(Continuous mode) where the  
subject is kept in focus by continuous adjustment while the shutter release  
button is pressed halfway, and f (Auto) which automatically switches  
between land k. The default setting is f.  
4
1
Set the focus mode lever to =.  
MF  
AF  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
113  
2
Look through the viewfinder and  
press the shutter release button  
halfway.  
The focus indicator ]appears and you  
will hear a beep when the subject comes  
into focus. (When blinking, the subject is  
not in focus.)  
4
Focus Indicator  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
114  
Using the =/L Button to Focus on the Subject  
You can set the camera so that focusing is performed when the =/L  
button is pressed. Use this setting when the autofocus by pressing the  
shutter release button halfway is not desired.  
1
Select [Enable AF1] or [Enable  
AF2] in [10. AF/AE-L Button] of  
the [A Custom Setting 2] menu.  
10. AF/AE-L Button  
1
2
3
4
Enable AF1  
Enable AF2  
Cancel AF  
AE Lock  
AF is performed when the  
AF/AE-L button is pressed  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
4
Auto focusing is performed by using the =/L  
button or the shutter release button. (default setting)  
1
2
Enable AF1  
Auto focusing is performed only when the =/L  
Enable AF2 button is pressed and not when the shutter release  
button is pressed halfway.  
\appears in the viewfinder while the =/L  
button is pressed. Auto focusing is not performed when  
the shutter release button is pressed. (Take your finger  
off the =/L button to return to normal autofocus  
mode.)  
3
4
Cancel AF  
AE Lock  
The exposure setting is locked when the =/L  
button is pressed. (p.108)  
2
Press the =/L button.  
Auto focusing is performed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
115  
Setting the AF Mode  
You can choose from the following three autofocus modes.  
Switches automatically between land kmodes  
according to the subject. (default setting)  
f
Auto  
• [AF Mode] is fixed to f in I (Auto Picture) mode.  
• Even if f is selected, [AF Mode] is fixed to l when  
shooting with Live View with the mode dial set to e, K, b, c  
or a.  
When the shutter release button is pressed halfway to focus on  
the subject, the focus is locked at that position.  
• The focus is locked while the focus indicator ]appears in the  
viewfinder. To focus on another subject, take your finger off the  
shutter release button first, then press the shutter release button  
halfway again.  
• The shutter cannot be released until the subject is in focus. If the  
subject is too close to the camera, move back and take the  
picture. Adjust the focus manually if it is difficult to focus on the  
subject (p.65). (p.121)  
4
l
Single mode  
• When the shutter release button is pressed halfway, the built-in  
flash will discharge automatically several times, making it easier  
to focus on the subject if the subject is in a dark area and the built-  
in flash is available.  
The subject is kept in focus by continuous adjustment while the  
shutter release button is pressed halfway. Even if the subject is  
not in focus, the shutter can be released when the shutter release  
button is pressed fully.  
• Available only when the mode dial is set to e, K, b, c or a.  
• [AF Mode] is fixed to kin \ (Moving Object) of Picture mode  
and n (Stage Lighting), R (Kids), Y (Pet) and l (Night Snap)  
of H (Scene) mode.  
k
Continuous  
mode  
• When the shutter release button is pressed halfway or the  
=/L button is used to adjust the focus, the camera  
automatically tracks the subject if it is determined to be a moving  
object.  
• The built-in flash will not discharge multiple times.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
116  
1
Set the focus mode lever to =.  
2
Press the M button in the status screen.  
The control panel appears.  
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.  
3
4
5
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to select [AF Mode]  
and press the 4 button.  
AF Mode  
AF.A  
HDR  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
The [AF Mode] screen appears.  
AF.A  
JPEG  
12M  
4
10/10/’09  
AF Mode  
AF.A  
10:30AM  
[
]
37  
Use the four-way controller (45)  
to select an AF mode.  
AF.S  
AF.C  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Press the 4 button.  
The camera returns to the control panel.  
• You can also change the setting from the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu (p.79).  
• [AF Mode] cannot be changed in Picture mode and H (Scene) mode.  
• Always set the camera to lwhen using the Quick-Shift Focus System on  
a DA lens.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
117  
Selecting the Focusing Area (AF Point)  
Choose the part of the viewfinder to set focus to.  
Auto  
Out of the 5 AF points, the camera selects the optimum AF  
b
c
(5 AF Points) point even if the subject is not centered. (default setting)  
Auto Out of the 11 AF points, the camera selects the optimum AF  
(11 AF Points) point even if the subject is not centered.  
Sets the focusing area to the user selected point from  
eleven points in the AF area.  
S Select  
O Spot  
Sets the focusing area to the center of the viewfinder.  
4
1
Press the 4 button in Capture mode.  
The [Select AF Point] screen appears.  
2
Turn the e-dial to select the AF  
point.  
Select AF Point  
AUTO  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
3
Press the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
• The focusing area can also be set in the control panel.  
• The AF point is fixed to O regardless of this setting when using lenses other  
than DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, FA or F lenses.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
118  
Setting the Focus Position in the AF Frame  
1
Set the AF point to S and press  
the four-way controller (3).  
Select AF Point  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
2
3
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to change the AF  
point.  
Select AF Point  
4
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Press the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
The selected AF point appears in the  
status screen.  
AUTO  
PICT  
AF.A  
1/20  
F5.6  
AUTO  
ISO 800  
AWB  
ISO  
-3  
2
1
1
2
+3  
OK  
[
]
JPEG 12M  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
119  
• If you press the | (Green) button while the status screen is displayed when  
[Center AF Point] is assigned to the | button in [Green Button] of the [A  
Rec. Mode 4] menu, the screen in Step 2 appears.  
• The position of the changed AF point is stored even if the camera is turned  
off or the focusing area is switched to b, c or O.  
Locking the Focus (Focus Lock)  
If the subject is outside the range of the focusing area, the camera cannot  
automatically focus on the subject. In this situation, set [AF Mode] to l  
(Single mode). You can aim the focusing area toward the subject, use the  
focus lock and recompose the picture.  
4
1
Set [AF Mode] to l.  
Refer to p.115.  
2
Frame the desired composition  
for your picture in the viewfinder.  
Example) The person is out of  
focus and the background is  
focused instead.  
3
Center the subject to focus in the  
viewfinder and press the shutter  
release button halfway.  
The focus indicator ]appears and you  
will hear a beep when the subject comes  
into focus. (When blinking, the subject is  
not in focus.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
120  
4
5
Lock the focus.  
Keep the shutter release button pressed halfway. The focus will remain  
locked.  
Recompose the picture while  
keeping the shutter release  
button pressed halfway.  
4
• The focus is locked while the focus indicator ]is displayed.  
• Turning the zoom ring with the focus locked may cause the subject to be out  
of focus.  
• The beep that sounds when the image is focused can be turned off. (p.243)  
• You cannot set the focus lock when [AF Mode] is set to k(Continuous  
mode), the Picture mode is set to \ (Moving Object) or H (Scene) mode  
is set to n (Stage Lighting), R (Kids), Y (Pet) or l (Night Snap). In such  
cases, the autofocus continues to focus on the subject until the shutter is  
released (Continuous Autofocus).  
Locking Exposure when the Focus is Locked  
5. AE-L with AF Locked  
[A Custom Setting 1] menu (p.81) to lock the  
exposure value while the focus is locked. By  
default, the exposure is not locked when the  
focus is locked.  
1
2
Off  
On  
AE is locked  
when the focus  
is locked  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Off Exposure is not locked when the focus is locked. (default setting)  
On Exposure is locked when the focus is locked.  
1
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
121  
Adjusting the Focus Manually (Manual Focus)  
When you adjust the focus manually, you can use either the focus  
indicator or the matte field in the viewfinder.  
Using the Focus Indicator  
The focus indicator ]appears in the viewfinder when the subject is in  
focus even during manual focus.  
You can manually adjust the focus using the focus indicator ].  
1
Set the focus mode lever to \.  
4
2
Look through the viewfinder,  
press the shutter release button  
halfway and turn the focusing  
ring.  
F
M
AF  
The focus indicator ]appears and you  
will hear a beep when the subject comes  
into focus.  
Focus Indicator  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
122  
• Adjust the focus manually using the matte field in the viewfinder when the  
subject is difficult to focus (p.65) and the focus indicator will not appear.  
• The beep that sounds when the image is focused can be turned off. (p.243)  
Using the Viewfinder Matte Field  
You can manually adjust the focus using the matte field in viewfinder.  
1
Set the focus mode lever to \.  
4
2
Look through the viewfinder and  
turn the focusing ring until the  
subject is clearly visible on the  
focusing screen.  
F
M
AF  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
123  
Shooting in Catch-in Focus Mode  
When [21. Catch-in Focus] in the [A Custom Setting 3] menu (p.82)  
is set to [On], if [AF Mode] is set to f or land one of the  
following types of lenses is attached, catch-in focus shooting is  
enabled and the shutter is released automatically when the subject  
comes into focus.  
• Manual focus lens  
• DA or FA lens that has an = and \setting on the lens (the  
setting on the lens must be set to \before shooting)  
 How to Take Pictures  
1 Attach a proper lens to the camera.  
2 Set the focus mode lever to =.  
4
3 Set [AF Mode] to f or l.  
4 Set the focus on a position the subject will pass.  
5 Press the shutter release button fully.  
The shutter is released automatically when the subject comes  
into focus in the set position.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
124  
Checking the Composition, Exposure  
and Focus Before Shooting (Preview)  
You can use the preview function to check depth of field, composition,  
exposure and focus before taking a picture.  
There are two preview methods.  
Preview Method  
Optical Preview  
Description  
|
For checking the depth of field with the viewfinder.  
For checking the composition, exposure and focus on  
the monitor.  
e
Digital Preview  
You can also use the Live View function to display a real-time image on the  
monitor and change the shooting function settings during display and check the  
settings by enlarging the image. Refer to p.143 for details.  
4
Assigning the Preview Function to the Green  
Button  
First, assign the Preview function to the | (Green) button.  
1
Select [Green Button] in the  
[ARec. Mode 4] menu and press  
the four-way controller (5).  
1
2
4
3
Green Button  
Memory  
Shake Reduction  
Input Focal Length  
35mm  
The [Green Button] screen appears.  
MENU  
Exit  
2
Press the four-way controller  
(5).  
Green Button  
Green Button  
P LINE  
Action in M Mode  
e-dial in Program  
P SHIFT  
MENU  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
125  
3
4
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [Optical Preview]  
or [Digital Preview] and press the  
4 button.  
Green Button  
Green Button  
Custom Image  
Optical Preview  
Digital Preview  
Digital Filter  
RAW RAW Button Function  
Center AF Point  
If you selected [Optical Preview], proceed  
to Step 6.  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [Histogram] or  
[Bright/Dark Area].  
Green Button  
Digital Preview  
Histogram  
Bright/Dark Area  
4
MENU  
5
6
Use the four-way controller (45) to select Oor P.  
Press the 3 button twice.  
The Preview function is assigned to the | button and the camera is  
ready to take a picture.  
While shooting with Multi-exposure or Live View, Optical Preview is used  
regardless of the setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
126  
Displaying the Optical Preview  
1
Position the subject inside the AF  
frame and press the shutter  
release button halfway to focus  
on the subject.  
4
2
3
Press the | button while looking  
through the viewfinder.  
You can check the depth of field in the  
viewfinder while the | button is pressed.  
During this time, no shooting information  
is displayed in the viewfinder, and the  
shutter cannot be released.  
Take your finger off the | button.  
Optical Preview is ended and the camera is ready to take a picture.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
127  
Displaying the Digital Preview  
1
Focus on the subject, then  
compose the picture in the  
viewfinder and press the |  
button.  
The icon (|) appears on the monitor  
during preview and you can check the  
composition, exposure and focus.  
4
INFO  
Available operations  
e-dial  
Enlarges the preview image. (p.202)  
M button  
Saves the preview image. Select [Save as]  
and press the 4 button.  
2
Press the shutter release button halfway.  
Digital Preview is ended and the autofocus system operates.  
The maximum display time for Digital Preview is 60 seconds.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
128  
Using Shake Reduction Function to  
Prevent Camera Shake  
Taking Pictures Using the Shake Reduction  
Function  
The Shake Reduction function reduces camera shake that occurs when  
the shutter release button is pressed. This is useful for taking pictures in  
situations where camera shake is likely to occur. The Shake Reduction  
function allows you to take pictures at approximately 4 steps slower  
shutter speed without the risk of camera shake.  
The Shake Reduction function is ideal when taking pictures in the following  
situations.  
4
• When taking pictures in dimly lit locations, such as indoors, at night,  
on cloudy days and in the shade  
• When taking telephoto pictures  
Picture taken with  
the Shake Reduction function  
Blurred picture  
• The Shake Reduction function does not compensate for blurring caused by  
subject movement. To take pictures of a moving subject, increase the shutter  
speed.  
• The Shake Reduction function may not fully reduce camera shake when  
taking close-up shots. In this case, it is recommended that the Shake  
Reduction function be turned off and the camera be used with a tripod.  
• The Shake Reduction function will not fully work when shooting with a very  
slow shutter speed, for example when panning or shooting night scenes. In  
this case, it is recommended that the Shake Reduction function be turned off  
and the camera be used with a tripod.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
129  
Setting the Shake Reduction Function  
1
Press the M button in the status screen.  
The control panel appears.  
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.  
2
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to select [Shake  
Shake Reduction  
On  
Reduction] and press the 4  
HDR  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
button.  
AF.A  
The [Shake Reduction] screen appears.  
JPEG  
12M  
4
10/10/’09  
10:30AM  
[
]
37  
3
Use the four-way controller (45)  
to select k (On) or l (Off).  
Shake Reduction  
On  
k: Uses Shake Reduction. (default  
setting)  
l: Does not use Shake Reduction.  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
4
5
Press the 4 button.  
The camera returns to the control panel.  
Press the shutter release button halfway.  
k appears in the viewfinder and the  
Shake Reduction function is activated.  
• Be sure to turn the Shake Reduction function off when using the camera with  
a tripod.  
The Shake Reduction function automatically turns off in the following situations.  
- Self-timer  
- Remote control shooting  
- Bulb shooting  
- HDR Capture  
- Using the external flash in the wireless mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
130  
• You can also change the setting from the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu (p.80).  
The Shake Reduction function will not fully work (for about 2 seconds) right  
after turning on the camera or restoring from Auto Power Off. Wait for the  
Shake Reduction function to become stable before gently pressing the shutter  
release button to take a picture. Press the shutter release button halfway. The  
camera is ready to take a picture when  
The Shake Reduction function is available with any  
lens. However, when the aperture ring is set to other than the  
or a lens without an position is used, the camera will not operate unless [22.  
Using Aperture Ring] is set to [Permitted] in the [ Custom Setting 4] menu. Set  
k
appears in the viewfinder.  
compatible PENTAX  
(Auto) position  
a
s
s
A
this beforehand. However, in such cases some functions will be restricted. Refer  
to “Notes on [22. Using Aperture Ring]” (p.284) for details.  
When the Focal Length Cannot Be Automatically Detected  
The Shake Reduction function operates by obtaining the lens information  
such as focal length.  
4
If the camera uses a DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, FA or F lens, the lens  
information is automatically obtained when the Shake Reduction function  
is activated.  
The [Input Focal Length] setting screen appears when the camera is  
turned on with the Shake Reduction function set to k and a type of lens  
that does not support automatic obtaining the lens information such as  
focal length (p.282) is mounted.  
Set the focal length manually in the [Input Focal Length] setting screen.  
• The [Input Focal Length] setting screen does not appear when using a lens  
that supports automatic obtaining the lens information such as focal length.  
• When using a lens without the sposition on the aperture or with the aperture  
set to a position other than the sposition, set [22. Using Aperture Ring] in  
the [A Custom Setting 4] menu to [Permitted]. (p.284)  
1
Use the four-way controller  
(45) or the e-dial to set the  
focal length.  
Input Focal Length  
100  
135  
Select from the following 34 focal length  
values. (The default setting is 35 mm.)  
120  
8
10 12 15 18 20 24 28 30 35  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
40 45 50 55 65 70 75 85 100 120  
135 150 180 200 250 300 350 400 450 500  
550 600 700 800  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
131  
• If the focal length for your lens is not listed above, select the value closest to  
the actual focal length (example: [18] for 17 mm and [100] for 105 mm).  
• When using a zoom lens, select the actual focal length at the zoom setting  
being used in the same manner.  
2
Press the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
• To change the focal length setting, use [Input Focal Length] in the [A Rec.  
• The effect of Shake Reduction is influenced by the shooting distance as well  
as focal length information. The Shake Reduction function may not work as  
effectively as expected when shooting at close ranges.  
4
Shooting with the Self-timer  
This camera has the following two types of self-timers.  
Self-timer  
(12 sec.)  
Shutter will be released after about 12 seconds. Use this mode  
to include the photographer in the picture.  
g
A mirror pops up immediately after shutter release button is  
pressed. The shutter is released after about 2 seconds. Use  
this mode to avoid camera shake when the shutter release  
button is pressed.  
Self-timer  
(2 sec.)  
Z
1
Mount the camera onto a tripod.  
2
Press the four-way controller (2) in Capture mode.  
The [Drive Mode] screen appears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
132  
3
4
Use the four-way controller  
(45) to select g.  
Drive Mode  
Single Frame Shooting  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Press the four-way controller (3)  
and use the four-way controller  
(45) to select g.  
Drive Mode  
Self-timer (12 sec.)  
2
s
4
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
5
6
Press the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
Press the shutter release button  
halfway.  
The autofocus system operates. The  
focus indicator ]appears in the  
viewfinder when the subject is in focus.  
7
Press the shutter release button  
fully.  
The front self-timer lamp starts blinking  
slowly and then blinks rapidly 2 seconds  
before the shutter is released. The beep  
is heard and the rate increases for the last  
2 seconds. The shutter will be released  
about 12 seconds after the shutter release button is pressed fully.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
133  
Using the Mirror Lock-up Function  
Use the Mirror Lock-up function if camera shake is evident even when a  
remote control unit (optional) is used with a tripod.  
When shooting with the 2 sec. self-timer, the mirror pops up and the  
shutter is released 2 seconds after you press the shutter release button,  
thereby avoiding the vibration of the mirror.  
Follow the procedure below to take a picture with the Mirror Lock-up  
function.  
1
Mount the camera onto a tripod.  
2
Select Z in the drive mode.  
4
Refer to Steps 1 to 5 on p.131 for details.  
3
4
Press the shutter release button halfway.  
The autofocus system operates. The focus indicator ]appears in the  
viewfinder when focused.  
Press the shutter release button fully.  
A picture is taken 2 seconds after the mirror pops up. The AE lock  
function is enabled with the exposure value set immediately before the  
mirror pops up.  
• The self-timer shooting is not available in \ (Moving Object) of Picture  
mode, and R (Kids) or Y (Pet) of H (Scene) mode.  
• Select a mode other than g or Z in the [Drive Mode] screen to cancel the  
self-timer shooting. The setting is canceled when the camera is turned off if  
[Drive Mode] is set to P(Off) in [Memory] (p.260) of the [A Rec. Mode 4]  
menu.  
• The Shake Reduction function is automatically turned off when g or Z is set.  
• You can set the camera so that the beep does not sound. (p.243)  
• The exposure may be affected if the light enters the viewfinder. Use the AE  
lock function (p.108). The light entering the viewfinder has no effect on the  
exposure when the mode dial is set to a(Manual) (p.100).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
134  
Shooting with the Remote Control (Optional)  
The shutter can be released from a distance by using the optional remote  
control unit. You can select from the following two settings for remote  
control shooting.  
The shutter will be released immediately after the shutter  
Remote Control  
h
i
release button on the remote control unit is pressed.  
Remote Control The shutter is released about 3 seconds after the shutter  
(3s delay) release button on the remote control unit is pressed.  
1
Mount the camera onto a tripod.  
4
2
Press the four-way controller (2) in Capture mode.  
The [Drive Mode] screen appears.  
3
4
Use the four-way controller (45) to select h.  
Press the four-way controller (3)  
Drive Mode  
and use the four-way controller  
Remote Control  
(45) to select hor i.  
The self-timer lamp will blink to let you  
know that the camera is in remote control  
stand-by status.  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
5
Press the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
135  
6
7
Press the shutter release button halfway.  
The autofocus system operates. The focus indicator ]appears in the  
viewfinder when focused.  
Point the remote control unit  
towards the remote control  
receiver on the front of the  
camera and press the shutter  
release button on the remote  
control unit.  
4 m  
The operating distance of the remote  
control unit is about 4 m from the front of the camera.  
4
After the picture is taken, the self-timer lamp lights for 2 seconds and  
then returns to blinking.  
• The remote control shooting is not available in \ (Moving Object) of Picture  
mode, and R (Kids) or Y (Pet) of H (Scene) mode.  
• By default, you cannot adjust the focus with the remote control unit. Focus on  
the subject first with the camera before operating with the remote control.  
When [11. AF with Remote Control] is set to [On] in the [A Custom Setting 2]  
menu (p.81), you can use the remote control unit to adjust the focus.  
• When using the remote control unit, the built-in flash does not pop up  
automatically even when set to g (Auto Flash Discharge). Press the K/  
i button to pop up the built-in flash beforehand. (p.70)  
• The exposure may be affected if the light enters the viewfinder. Use the AE  
lock function (p.108). The light entering the viewfinder has no effect on the  
exposure when the mode dial is set to a(Manual) (p.100).  
• Select a mode other than hor i in the [Drive Mode] screen to cancel the  
remote control shooting. The setting is canceled when the camera is turned  
off if [Drive Mode] is set to P(Off) in [Memory] (p.260) of the [ARec. Mode 4]  
menu.  
• The Shake Reduction function is automatically turned off when hor i is set.  
• The remote control may not operate in backlit conditions.  
• The remote control unit battery can send a remote control signal about  
30,000 times. Contact PENTAX Service Center to replace the battery (this  
will involve a fee).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
136  
Taking Pictures Continuously  
Continuous Shooting  
Pictures can be taken continuously while the shutter release button is kept  
pressed.  
The following two types of continuous shooting are available.  
When JPEG image quality is set to E/C, up to 17  
Continuous  
Shooting (Hi)  
frames are taken continuously at approximately 4.7 fps.  
The shooting interval will increase as the camera buffer  
memory fills up.  
g
h
4
When JPEG image quality is set to E/C, pictures are  
taken continuously at approximately 2 fps until the SD  
Memory Card is full.  
Continuous  
Shooting (Lo)  
When the file format is [RAW], up to 5 frames for g or up to 11 frames for h  
can be taken continuously.  
1
Press the four-way controller (2) in Capture mode.  
The [Drive Mode] screen appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller  
(45) to select g.  
Drive Mode  
Single Frame Shooting  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
3
Press the four-way controller (3)  
and use the four-way controller  
(45) to select g or h.  
Drive Mode  
Continuous Shooting (Hi)  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
137  
4
5
Press the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take pictures continuously.  
Press the shutter release button halfway.  
The autofocus system operates. The focus indicator ]appears in the  
viewfinder when focused.  
6
Press the shutter release button fully.  
Pictures are taken continuously while the shutter release button is fully  
pressed. Take your finger off the shutter release button to stop.  
• The drive mode is fixed to g in \ (Moving Object) of Picture mode, and R  
(Kids) or Y (Pet) of H (Scene) mode.  
4
• If [AF Mode] is set to l(Single mode), the focus position is locked on the  
first frame and pictures are taken continuously at the same interval.  
• Focusing is continuously activated during continuous shooting when  
[AF Mode] is set to k(Continuous mode).  
• The shutter cannot be released until charging is complete when using the  
built-in flash. You can set the camera to enable shutter release before the  
built-in flash is ready in [16. Release While Charging] of the [A Custom  
Setting 3] menu. (p.73)  
• Select a mode other than g or h in the [Drive Mode] screen to cancel the  
continuous shooting. The setting is canceled when the camera is turned off if  
[Drive Mode] is set to P(Off) in [Memory] (p.260) of the [A Rec. Mode 4]  
menu.  
• The shooting speed may be slower when [Distortion Correction] or [Lat-  
Chromatic-Ab Adj] (p.192) is set to [On].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
138  
Multi-exposure  
You can create a composite picture while taking multiple frames.  
Multi-exposure is not available when the mode dial is set to C (Movie), or when  
Cross Processing, Digital Filter or HDR Capture is set.  
1
Select [Multi-exposure] in the [ARec. Mode 2] menu and  
press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Multi-exposure] screen appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Number of  
Shots].  
4
Press the four-way controller (5)  
Multi-exposure  
and use the four-way controller  
Start Shooting  
(23) to select the number of  
shots.  
Number of Shots  
2times  
Auto EV Adjustment  
Select from 2 to 9 shots.  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
4
5
Press the 4 button.  
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Auto EV  
Adjustment] and use the four-way controller (45) to  
select Oor P.  
When set to O, the exposure is adjusted automatically according to the  
number of shots.  
6
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Start  
Shooting] and press the 4 button.  
The camera returns to Capture mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
139  
7
Take the picture.  
The composite picture is displayed in Instant Review each time the  
shutter release button is pressed. Press the K/ibutton during  
Instant Review to discard pictures taken up to that point and take pictures  
again from the first frame.  
The pictures are saved when the set number of shots has been taken,  
and then the [Multi-exposure] screen appears again.  
• Multi-exposure and Exposure Bracketing cannot be used at the same time.  
The mode set last is used.  
• [Distortion Correction] and [Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj] (p.192) are disabled when  
Multi-exposure is set.  
4
• If any of the following operations are performed while shooting, the pictures  
that have been already taken are saved and Multi-exposure is exited.  
- The Q button, 3 button, four-way controller (234) or M button  
is pressed  
- The mode dial is turned  
- Exposure Bracketing is set  
• When shooting in Multi-exposure mode using Live View, a semi-transparent  
composite image of the pictures taken is displayed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
140  
Taking Pictures Using Digital Filters  
You can apply a filter when taking pictures.  
The following filters can be selected.  
Filter Name  
Effect  
Parameter  
Shading Level: +1/+2/+3  
For taking pictures that look as Blur: +1/+2/+3  
if taken with a toy camera.  
Toy Camera  
Tone Break: Red/Green/Blue/  
Yellow  
Toning: -3 to +3  
For taking pictures with the  
look of old photos.  
Retro  
Frame Composite: None/Thin/  
Medium/Thick  
4
For taking pictures with high  
contrasts.  
High Contrast  
+1 to +5  
Color: Red/Magenta/Blue/  
Cyan/Green/Yellow  
For extracting a specific color  
Extract Color and making the rest of the  
image black and white.  
Color Freq. Range: -2 to +2  
Soft Focus: +1/+2/+3  
For taking pictures with a soft  
focus throughout the image.  
Soft  
Shadow Blur: OFF/ON  
For taking pictures of night  
scenes or lights reflected on  
Effect Density: Small/Medium/  
Large  
water with a special sparkling  
look achieved by adding cross-  
like effects to the picture's  
highlights.  
Star Burst  
Size: Short/Medium/Long  
Angle: 0°/30°/45°/60°  
For taking pictures that look as  
Fish-eye  
Weak/Medium/Strong  
if taken with a fish-eye lens.  
High Contrast: OFF/+1 to +5  
Soft Focus: OFF/+1/+2/+3  
Tone Break: OFF/Red/Green/  
Blue/Yellow  
Shading Type: 6 types  
Shading Level: -3 to +3  
Distortion Type: 3 types  
Customize and save a filter to  
Custom Filter  
your own preferences.  
Distortion Level: OFF/Weak/  
Medium/Strong  
Invert Color: OFF/ON  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
141  
• When Digital Filter is set, the file format is always set to [JPEG] and cannot  
be changed. You cannot use Digital Filter when the file format is set to [RAW]  
or [RAW+].  
• When Digital Filter is set, Multi-exposure is not available.  
• Digital Filter and HDR Capture cannot be used at the same time. The mode  
set last is used.  
Depending on the filter used, it may take longer to save images.  
1
Press the M button in the status screen.  
The control panel appears.  
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.  
4
2
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to select [Digital Filter]  
Digital Filter  
Not use any filters  
and press the 4 button.  
HDR  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
The screen for selecting the filter  
AF.A  
appears.  
JPEG  
12M  
10/10/’09  
10:30AM  
[
]
37  
3
Use the four-way controller  
(45) to select a filter.  
OFF  
Star Burst  
INFO  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
Check  
OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
142  
4
5
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select the parameter and  
the four-way controller (45) to  
adjust the parameter’s value.  
Effect Density  
INFO  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
Check  
OK  
Available operations  
mcbutton  
You can use Digital Preview to preview the  
background image with the selected filter.  
M button  
Saves the background image. Select [Save as] and  
press the 4 button.  
4
Press the 4 button.  
The camera returns to the control panel.  
• You can also change the settings from the [ARec. Mode 2] menu (p.79).  
• Select [Not use any filters] in Step 3 to finish shooting with digital filter.  
• You can also apply digital filter effects to images after shooting them in  
Playback mode (p.227).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
143  
Shooting with the Live View  
You can shoot a picture or a movie while displaying the real-time image on  
the monitor.  
• The image in Live View may differ from the captured image if the brightness  
of the subject is low or high.  
• If any changes occur in the shooting light source during Live View, the image  
may flicker.  
• If the camera position is changed rapidly during Live View, the image may not  
be displayed with the appropriate brightness. Wait for the display to become  
stable before shooting.  
• Noise may appear on the Live View image when used in dark locations.  
• If you continue shooting with the Live View for a prolonged period, the  
internal temperature of the camera may increase, resulting in lower quality  
images. It is recommended that you turn off Live View when not shooting. To  
prevent the image quality from degrading, allow enough time for the camera  
to cool down while shooting with long exposures or recording movies.  
• If the internal temperature of the camera is high, l (temperature warning) will  
appear on the monitor and Live View may not be available.  
• If Live View is used in places where the camera may become hot, such as in  
direct sunlight, l (temperature warning) may appear on the monitor. Cancel  
Live View, as the internal temperature of the camera is rising.  
• Live View can be displayed for up to 5 minutes. However, if Live View is used  
even after l (temperature warning) appears, Live View may end before 5  
minutes elapse. Shooting with the viewfinder is available even if Live View is  
ended.  
4
• The higher the sensitivity, the more noise and color unevenness may occur in  
the Live View image and/or captured image.  
• Shooting while holding the camera by hand and viewing the monitor can  
cause camera shake. Use of a tripod is recommended.  
• Live View is not displayed when data is being saved to an SD Memory Card.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
144  
Taking Still Pictures  
Setting the Live View  
You can set the display items and autofocus mode for Live View.  
1
Select [Live View] in the [ARec. Mode 3] menu and press  
the four-way controller (5).  
The [Live View] screen appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select [Info Overlay], [Show  
Grid], [Histogram]or[Bright/Dark  
Live View  
4
Info Overlay  
Show Grid  
Histogram  
Area].  
Bright/Dark Area  
Autofocus Mode  
MENU  
3
4
Use the four-way controller (45) to select Oor P.  
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Autofocus  
Mode] and press the four-way controller (5).  
5
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select an autofocus mode.  
Live View  
Info Overlay  
Show Grid  
Histogram  
Bright/Dark Area  
Autofocus Mode  
MENU  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
145  
Gives autofocus priority to detected faces and  
performs contrast autofocus. A yellow frame  
appears for the main face (white frames appear for  
other faces), and autofocus and automatic exposure  
are performed for the main face. (default setting)  
Face Detection  
AF  
I
Displays Live View and performs autofocus based  
on the information obtained from the image sensor.  
i Contrast AF  
Phase  
S
Cancels Live View and performs autofocus with the  
AF sensor.  
Difference AF  
6
7
Press the 4 button.  
Press the 3 button twice.  
4
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.  
• It takes more time to focus on the subject when using I or i than when  
using S. It is also difficult for the camera to focus on the following objects  
(or under the following conditions).  
- Objects with poor contrast  
- Objects with no vertical contrast, such as horizontal stripes  
- Objects with constantly changing brightness, shape, or color, such as a  
water fountain  
- Objects whose distance from the camera changes  
- Small objects  
- Objects appearing in both the foreground and background  
- When using a special filter  
- Objects at the edge of the screen  
• If the shutter release button is pressed halfway during Live View when  
[Autofocus Mode] is set to S (Phase Difference AF), the Live View image  
will disappear and the autofocus system operates. Once focused, the Live  
View image will be displayed again.  
• The face detection is not performed when the focus mode is set to \  
(except when in I (Auto Picture)).  
• When [AF Mode] is set to k(Continuous mode), the built-in flash will not  
discharge multiple times.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
146  
Taking a Still Picture  
1
Select a Capture mode.  
Set the mode dial to any mode other than C.  
2
Press the U button.  
4
The mirror pops up and a real-time image is displayed on the monitor.  
Press the U button again to exit Live View.  
Live View can be displayed for up to 5 minutes. When the Live View  
display is cancelled after the elapse of 5 minutes, Live View can be  
restarted by pressing the U button. If the internal temperature of the  
camera is high, Live View ends before 5 minutes elapse.  
Live View display  
(All of the indicators are displayed here for explanatory purposes.)  
1
2 3 4 5 6  
7
8
2/5  
SHIFT  
P
P
9
11  
12  
+1.0  
13  
14  
OK  
10  
-3  
2
1
1
2 +3  
2000 F2.8 ISO3200  
1234  
2000 F2.8 ISO400  
[
]
[
]
37  
15 16 1718 19  
20  
21  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
147  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Capture Mode  
Flash Mode  
13 EV Compensation  
14 Histogram  
15 AE lock  
Drive Mode  
White Balance  
Custom Image  
16 Shutter speed  
17 Aperture value  
18 EV bar  
Multi-exposure/Digital Filter/  
HDR Capture/Cross Processing  
19 Sensitivity  
7
Number of shots using Multi-  
exposure  
20 Remaining image storage  
capacity  
8
9
Battery level  
21 Main facedetectionframe (Face  
Detection AF)  
Temperature warning  
10 Change AF point  
22 Face detection frame (Face  
Detection AF)  
11 Contrast AF frame  
12 Phase Difference AF frame/AF  
4
point  
* Indicator 12 (Phase Difference AF frame) is displayed in white during  
Live View. When the subject is in focus, a green square frame is  
displayed instead. It turns red when the subject is not in focus. It is not  
displayed when the focus mode is set to \.  
* Indicators 21 and 22 are displayed when [Autofocus Mode] is set to I  
and the camera detects person’s face(s). (Up to 16 face recognition  
frames are displayed on the monitor.)  
Available operations  
M button  
Enlarges the image to 2, 4, 6 times (when the focus mode  
is set to \, enlarges the image to 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 times).  
Use the four-way controller (2345) to move the display  
area, and press the | (Green) button to return the display  
area to the center. (Available only when [Green Button] is  
assigned to the | (Green) button in [Green Button] of the  
[ARec. Mode 4] menu (p.179).)  
3
4
Position the subject on the monitor and press the shutter  
release button halfway.  
The autofocus system operates.  
When the focus mode is set to \, turn the focusing ring until the subject  
is clearly visible on the focusing screen.  
Press the shutter release button fully.  
The picture is taken.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
148  
• When [AF Mode] is set to l and [Autofocus Mode] is set to I or i,  
press the 4 button and use the four-way controller (2345) to change  
the AF point. Press the 4 button again to cancel the changing of the AF  
point. When [Autofocus Mode] is set to S (Phase Difference AF) and  
[Select AF Point] is set to S (Select), the AF point can be changed.  
• When [AF Mode] is set to kand [Autofocus Mode] is set to I or i, the  
camera focuses on the center of the screen when auto focusing starts and  
then automatically tracks the subject when it is in focus.  
• Images captured in magnified display are recorded at normal size.  
• If [Optical Preview] or [Digital Preview] is assigned to the | (Green) button  
in [Green Button] of the [ARec. Mode 4] menu, you can check the depth of  
field on the monitor when you press the | button. (p.124)  
The status screen and control panel cannot be displayed during Live View. To  
change the settings, press the 3 button and change them in each menu.  
4
Recording Movies  
You can record movies with a frame rate (number of frames shot per  
second) at 24 frames per second (fps), monaural audio, and the file format  
set to AVI.  
Changing the Movie Settings  
1
Select [Movie] in the [ARec. Mode 3] menu and press the  
four-way controller (5).  
The [Movie] screen appears.  
2
Press the four-way controller (5)  
and use the four-way controller  
00:00'00"  
Recorded Pixels  
Quality Level  
Sound  
(23) to select the number of  
recorded pixels.  
Movie Aperture Control Fixed  
Shake Reduction  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
149  
Recorded Pixels  
X (default setting)  
Y
Pixels  
Aspect Ratio  
16:9  
1280×720  
640×416  
3:2  
3
4
5
Press the 4 button.  
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Quality Level].  
Press the four-way controller (5) and use the four-way  
controller (23) to select the quality level.  
Select from C(Best; default setting), D (Better) and E(Good).  
When the recorded pixels and quality level are changed, the amount of  
recordable time at that setting appears at the top right of the screen.  
4
6
7
Press the 4 button.  
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Sound].  
Use the four-way controller (45) to select g or Z.  
8
g : Records sound. (default setting)  
Z : Does not record sound.  
9
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Movie  
Aperture Control].  
10 Press the four-way controller (5) and use the four-way  
controller (23) to select [Auto] or [Fixed].  
Auto: The aperture is controlled automatically. (The aperture value is  
fixed while recording a movie.)  
Fixed: The movie is recorded at the aperture value set before movie  
recording starts. (default setting)  
11 Press the 4 button.  
12 Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Shake  
Reduction].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
150  
13 Use the four-way controller (45) to select k or l.  
k: Uses Shake Reduction.  
l: Does not use Shake Reduction. (default setting)  
14 Press the 3 button twice.  
The camera is ready to record a movie.  
Recording Movies  
1
Set the mode dial to C.  
4
Live View for movie recording is  
displayed.  
Sound  
Live View can be displayed for up to 5  
minutes. When the Live View display is  
cancelled after the elapse of 5 minutes,  
Live View can be restarted by pressing  
the U button. If the internal temperature  
of the camera is high, Live View ends  
before 5 minutes elapse.  
-2  
1
1
+2  
:
F2.8  
00 30'00"  
Recordable Time  
Shake Reduction  
2
Position the subject on the monitor and press the shutter  
release button halfway.  
The autofocus system operates.  
When the focus mode is set to \, turn the focusing ring until the subject  
is clearly visible on the focusing screen.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
151  
3
4
5
When [Movie Aperture Control] is set to [Fixed] (p.149), set  
the aperture using the e-dial.  
Press the shutter release button fully.  
Recording of the movie starts.  
Press the shutter release button again.  
Recording stops.  
• When [Sound] is set to g, the camera operation sounds are also recorded.  
When recording a movie, mount the camera onto a tripod and do not operate  
the camera while recording.  
• When recording a movie, regardless of the AF mode setting, recording starts  
when the shutter release button is pressed fully even if the subject is not in  
focus.  
4
• While recording a movie, the autofocus system does not operate.  
• The flash is not available.  
• You can record movies continuously up to 4 GB or 25 minutes. When the SD  
Memory Card is full, recording stops and the movie is saved.  
• If you intend to shoot continuously for a long period, use of the AC adapter  
kit K-AC84 (optional) is recommended. (p.42)  
• You can also use the optional remote control to control recording operations.  
• When recording movies, only the White Balance and Custom Image (other  
than Fine Sharpness) settings can be used.  
• The sensitivity is fixed to [AUTO].  
• If a high temperature is reached inside the camera during movie recording,  
the recording may be terminated to protect the camera circuitry.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
152  
Playing Back Movies  
Recorded movies can be played back in Playback mode in the same  
manner as saved images.  
1
Press the Q button.  
2
Use the four-way controller (45) to choose a movie to  
play back.  
The first frame of the movie is displayed on the monitor.  
3
Press the four-way controller  
(2).  
4
Movie playback starts.  
Movie 10min00sec  
100-0001  
Available operations  
Four-way controller (2)  
e-dial  
Pause/Resume playback  
Volume control (6 levels)  
Four-way controller (5)  
Frame advance (when paused)  
Fast forward playback while pressed  
Press and hold four-way  
controller (5)  
Four-way controller (4)  
Reverse playback/  
Frame reverse (when paused)  
Press and hold four-way  
controller (4)  
Fast reverse playback while pressed  
Stop  
Four-way controller (3)  
When the movie ends, playback stops and the first frame is displayed.  
You can use the optional AV cable (I-AVC7) to play back recorded movies on  
a TV screen or other AV devices. (p.221)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
153  
Capturing a Still Picture from a Movie  
You can capture a single frame from a movie recorded with the a and  
save it as a JPEG still picture.  
1
Pause the movie in Step 3 of “Playing Back Movies” to  
display the frame to save as a still picture.  
2
Press the M button.  
The save confirmation screen appears.  
4
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select [Save as].  
Saves the image as a new file  
Save as  
Cancel  
OK  
OK  
Press the 4 button.  
The captured image is saved as a new image.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
154  
Memo  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Using the Flash  
This chapter provides details on the built-in flash of the  
a and describes how to take pictures with an external  
flash.  
..............................................................................156  
Flash ....................................................................160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
156  
Flash Characteristics in Each  
Exposure Mode  
Using the Flash in b(Shutter Priority) Mode  
• When taking a moving subject, you can use the flash to change the blur  
effect.  
• Any desired shutter speed of 1/180 sec. or slower can be set for taking  
a flash photograph.  
• The aperture value automatically changes according to the ambient  
brightness.  
• The shutter speed is locked at 1/180 sec. when a lens other than a DA,  
DA L, D FA, FA J, FA, F or A lens is used.  
Using the Flash in c(Aperture Priority) Mode  
5
• You can set the desired aperture value to take a flash photograph when  
you want to change the depth of field or shoot a subject farther away.  
• The shutter speed automatically changes with the ambient brightness.  
• The shutter speed shifts automatically anywhere from 1/180 sec. to a  
slow shutter speed (p.60) that reduces camera shake. The slowest  
shutter speed depends on the focal length of the lens in use.  
• The shutter speed is locked at 1/180 sec. when a lens other than a DA,  
DA L, D FA, FA J, FA or F lens is used.  
Using the Slow-speed Sync  
You can use Slow-speed Sync in . (Night Scene Portrait) of Picture  
mode or b(Shutter Priority) mode when shooting portraits with the sunset  
in the background. Both the portrait and the background are captured  
beautifully.  
• Slow-speed Sync slows the shutter speed. Use the Shake Reduction function  
or turn off the Shake Reduction function and use a tripod to avoid camera  
shake. The picture will also blur if the subject moves.  
• Slow-speed Sync shooting can also be performed with an external flash.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
157  
Using bMode  
1
Set the mode dial to b.  
2
Use the e-dial to set the shutter speed.  
The background is not properly exposed if the aperture value is blinking  
when the shutter speed is set. Adjust the shutter speed so that the  
aperture value does not blink.  
3
4
Press the K/ibutton.  
The built-in flash pops up.  
Take a picture.  
5
Using e/K/cMode  
1
Set the mode dial to e, K or c.  
2
3
4
Press the K/ibutton.  
The built-in flash pops up.  
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The [Flash Mode] screen appears.  
Select G or H and press the 4 button.  
The shutter speed is set slower to give the proper exposure for the  
background.  
5
Take a picture.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
158  
Using aMode  
1
Set the mode dial to a.  
2
Set the shutter speed and aperture value to obtain the  
proper exposure.  
Set 1/180 sec. shutter speed or slower.  
3
Press the K/ibutton.  
The built-in flash pops up.  
In a(Manual) mode, you can raise the built-in flash at any time prior to  
shooting.  
4
Take a picture.  
5
Using the Trailing Curtain Sync  
Trailing Curtain Sync discharges the flash immediately before the shutter  
curtain closes. When shooting moving objects with a slow shutter speed,  
Trailing Curtain Sync and Slow-speed Sync produce different effects  
depending on when the flash is discharged.  
For example, when shooting a moving car with Trailing Curtain Sync,  
trailing light is captured while the shutter is open and the flash captures the  
car immediately before the shutter is closed. Therefore, the picture will  
include a sharp, well-lit car with trailing lights behind it.  
Slow-speed Sync  
Trailing Curtain Sync  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
159  
1
Set the mode dial to e, K, b, cor a.  
2
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The [Flash Mode] screen appears.  
3
4
Select I or k and press the 4 button.  
Press the K/ibutton.  
The built-in flash pops up.  
5
Take a picture.  
Trailing Curtain Sync slows the shutter speed. Use the Shake Reduction  
function or turn off the Shake Reduction function and use a tripod to avoid  
camera shake.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
160  
Distance and Aperture when Using  
the Built-in Flash  
Relationships between the guide number, aperture and distance must be  
considered when shooting with the flash to obtain the correct exposure.  
Calculate and adjust the shooting conditions if the flash output is not sufficient.  
ISO Sensitivity  
ISO 200  
Built-in Flash Guide Number  
Approx. 16  
ISO 400  
Approx. 24  
ISO 800  
Approx. 32  
ISO 1600  
ISO 3200  
ISO 6400  
Approx. 48  
Approx. 64  
Approx. 96  
Calculating Shooting Distance from Aperture Value  
The following equation calculates the distance of the flash for aperture values.  
Maximum flash distance L1 = Guide number ÷ Aperture value  
5
Minimum flash distance L2 = Maximum flash distance ÷ 5*  
* The value 5 used in the formula above is a fixed value  
which applies only when using the built-in flash alone.  
Example)  
When the sensitivity is ISO 200 and the aperture value is F4.0  
L1 = 16 ÷ 4.0 = approx. 4 (m)  
L2 = 4 ÷ 5 = approx. 0.8 (m)  
Therefore, the flash can be used in a range of about 0.8 m to 4 m.  
However, the built-in flash in this camera cannot be used when the distance  
is 0.7 m or less. When the flash is used at closer than 0.7 m, it causes  
vignetting in the picture corners, the light is distributed unevenly and the  
picture may be overexposed.  
Calculating Aperture Value from Shooting Distance  
The following equation calculates the aperture value for shooting distances.  
Aperture value F = Guide number ÷ Shooting distance  
Example)  
When the sensitivity is ISO 200 and the shooting distance is 5 m, the  
aperture value is:  
F = 16 ÷ 5 = 3.2  
If the resulting number (3.2, in the above example) is not available as a  
lens aperture, the smaller number that is closest (2.8, in the above  
example) is generally used.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
161  
Lens Compatibility with the Built-in  
Flash  
Depending on the lens used with the a, even if a lens without a hood  
is attached, the use of the built-in flash may not be available or may be  
limited due to vignetting.  
DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, and FA lenses not listed below can be used without  
problems.  
* The following lenses were evaluated without a hood.  
Unavailable due to vignetting  
Lens Name  
DA FISH-EYE 10-17mm F3.5-4.5ED (IF)  
DA12-24mm F4ED AL  
DA14mm F2.8ED (IF)  

FA 300mm F2.8ED (IF)  
5

FA 600mm F4ED (IF)  

FA 250-600mm F5.6ED (IF)  
Available depending on other factors  
Lens Name  
Restrictions  
Vignetting may occur if the focal length is less  
than 20 mm.  
F FISH-EYE 17-28mm F3.5-4.5  
When the focal length is less than 28 mm or  
when the focal length is 28 mm and the  
shooting distance is 1 m or less, vignetting  
may occur.  
DA16-45mm F4ED AL  
When the focal length is 20 mm or less or when  
DA 16-50mm F2.8ED AL (IF) SDM the focal length is 35 mm and the shooting  
distance is less than 1.5 m, vignetting may occur.  

When the focal length is less than 24 mm or  
DA17-70mm F4AL (IF) SDM  
when the focal length is 24 mm and the shooting  
distance is 1 m or less, vignetting may occur.  
Vignetting may occur if the focal length is less  
than 35 mm.  
DA18-250mm F3.5-6.3ED AL (IF)  
Vignetting may occur if the focal length is 28  
mm and the shooting distance is less than 1 m.  

FA 28-70mm F2.8AL  
FA SOFT 28mm F2.8  
FA SOFT 85mm F2.8  
Built-in flash always discharges fully.  
Built-in flash always discharges fully.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
162  
Using an External Flash (Optional)  
Using the optional external flash AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ, AF200FG or  
AF160FC enables a variety of flash modes, such as P-TTL auto flash  
mode, depending on the external flash being used. See the chart below for  
details.  
(z: Available #: Restricted ×: Not available)  
Flash  
Built-in  
Flash  
AF540FGZ AF200FG  
AF360FGZ AF160FC  
Camera Function  
Red-eye reduction flash  
Auto flash discharge  
z
z
z
z
z
z
After the flash is charged, the camera  
automatically switches to the flash sync speed.  
z
z
z
z
z
z
5
Aperture value is automatically set in e  
mode and bmode.  
Auto check in the viewfinder  
P-TTL auto flash  
×
×
×
z
z
×
z
z
z
z
z
z
×
z
z
×
Slow-speed Sync  
Flash exposure compensation  
AF assist light of external flash  
Trailing Curtain Sync*2  
Contrast-control-sync flash mode  
Slave flash  
z
×
#
#
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Multiple flash  
High-speed flash sync  
Wireless flash  
z
#
*1 Available only when using a DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, FA, F or A lens.  
*2 Shutter speed of 1/90 sec. or slower.  
*3 When combined with the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ, 1/3 of the flash discharge can be  
output by the built-in flash and 2/3 can be output by the external flash.  
*4 Available only when combined with the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ.  
*5 Multiple AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ units, or a combination of an AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ  
unit and the built-in flash is required.  
Flashes with reversed polarity (the center contact on the hot shoe is minus)  
cannot be used due to the risk of damaging the camera or flash.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
163  
About the Display Panel for AF360FGZ  
The AF360FGZ itself does not have the function to set the FORMAT  
size to [DIGITAL]. However, when it is used with a SLR Digital  
Camera, the difference in focal length between a 35 mm camera and  
the a is automatically calculated based on the difference in angle  
of view and is displayed on the panel (when using DA, DA L, D FA,  
FA J, FA or F lens).  
The conversion indicator appears and the format size indicator  
disappears when the exposure metering timer of the a is on (it  
returns to 35 mm format display when the exposure metering timer is  
turned off).  
85mm  
/77mm  
28mm  
/24mm  
Lens Focal Length  
50mm 35mm  
20mm 18 mm  
Exposure metering  
timer Off  
85mm 70mm 50mm 35mm 28mm 24mm*  
Exposure metering  
timer On  
5
58mm 48mm 34mm 24mm 19mm 16mm*  
* Using wide-angle panel  
Using P-TTL Auto Mode  
You can use [P-TTL Auto] with the AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ, AF200FG or  
AF160FC flash unit. The flash pre-flashes before the actual flash and  
confirms the subject (the distance, brightness, contrast, whether it is  
backlit, etc.) using the camera 16-segment metering sensor. The flash  
output for the actual flash is adjusted based on the information obtained  
from the pre-flash, enabling flash photography with more accurate  
exposure for the subject than with normal TTL auto.  
1
Remove the cover of the hot shoe and attach the external  
flash.  
2
3
Turn on the camera and the external flash.  
Set the external flash mode to [P-TTL auto].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
164  
4
Confirm that the external flash is fully charged and then  
take a picture.  
• P-TTL auto is only available with an AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ, AF200FG or  
AF160FC flash unit.  
• The b will light in the viewfinder when the flash is ready (fully charged).  
• For details such as operation method and effective distance, please refer to  
the external flash manual.  
• The flash does not discharge if the subject is bright enough when the flash  
mode is set to C or i. Therefore, it may not be suitable for daylight-sync  
shooting.  
• Never press the K/ibutton when any external flash unit is attached to  
the camera. The built-in flash will hit the external flash. If you want to use both  
at once, set the wireless mode or connect them using the extension cord.  
Using High-Speed Flash Sync Mode  
5
With the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ, you can discharge the flash to take a  
picture at a shutter speed faster than 1/180 seconds.  
1
Remove the cover of the hot shoe and attach the external  
flash (AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ) to the camera.  
2
3
4
Set the mode dial to bor a.  
Turn on the camera and the external flash.  
Set the external flash sync mode to HSb (high-speed  
flash sync).  
5
Confirm that the external flash is fully charged and then  
take a picture.  
• The b will light in the viewfinder when the flash is ready (fully charged).  
• High-speed flash sync is available only when the shutter speed is set faster  
than 1/180 sec.  
• High-speed flash sync is not available when the shutter speed is set to h.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
165  
Using Flash in Wireless Mode  
By using two external flashes (AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ) or using the  
built-in flash with one or more external flashes, you can shoot in P-TTL  
flash mode without connecting the flash units with a cord.  
• Set the power switch of the external flash to WIRELESS.  
• Two or more AF540FGZ/AF360FGZ external flashes are required to use  
high-speed flash sync in the wireless mode. This function cannot be used in  
combination with the built-in flash.  
• Set the wireless mode of the external flash not directly connected to the  
camera to SLAVE.  
Setting the Channel for the External Flash  
First, set the channel for the external flash unit.  
5
1
Set the channel for the external flash unit.  
2
Remove the cover of the hot shoe and attach the external  
flash.  
3
Turn on the camera and the external flash, and press the  
shutter release button halfway.  
The built-in flash is set to the same channel as the external flash unit.  
• When set to r mode, the channel currently set for the built-in flash is  
displayed in the viewfinder for 10 seconds.  
• Be sure to set all the flashes to the same channel. Refer to the manual of  
AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ for details on how to set the channel on the  
external flash.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
166  
Using the Built-in Flash in Wireless Mode  
Set the camera to wireless flash mode when using an external flash in  
combination with the built-in flash.  
1
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The [Flash Mode] screen appears.  
2
Select r and press the 4  
button.  
Flash Mode  
Wireless Mode  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
0.0  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
5
When the drive mode is set to i (Remote Control (3s delay)) or the lens  
aperture is not set to the sposition, r cannot be selected.  
Changing the Built-in Flash Discharge Method  
You can change the built-in flash discharge method used in wireless  
mode.  
Set in [17. Flash in Wireless Mode] of the [A Custom Setting 3] menu  
(p.82).  
1
2
On  
Off  
Discharges the built-in flash as a master. (default setting)  
Discharges the built-in flash as a control flash.  
HSb (High-speed flash sync) is not available with the built-in flash.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
167  
Wireless Shooting  
 Using a Combination of the Built-in Flash and an External Flash  
Unit  
1
Remove the external flash unit after the channel is set on  
the camera, and place it at the desired location.  
2
3
Set the camera flash to r mode, and press the K/i  
button.  
Confirm that both flashes are fully charged and then take  
a picture.  
 Using a Combination of External Flash Units  
5
1
Set the wireless mode of the external flash directly  
connected to the camera to [MASTER] or [CONTROL].  
Sets the camera to discharge both the flash directly  
MASTER  
connected to the camera and the wireless flash unit.  
Sets the camera to discharge the flash directly connected  
CONTROL  
to the camera as a control flash only, not as the main flash.  
2
3
On the wireless remote flash unit, set the wireless flash  
mode to [SLAVE] and set the channel to the same channel  
as the flash directly connected to the camera. Then, place  
it at the desired location.  
Confirm that both flashes are fully charged and then take  
a picture.  
• The Shake Reduction function is automatically turned off in wireless mode.  
• When using multiple AF540FGZ/AF360FGZ external flashes and performing  
high-speed flash sync shooting in wireless mode, set the flash directly  
connected to the camera to high-speed flash sync mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
168  
Wireless Flash Control (P-TTL Flash Mode)  
When using external flash units (AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ) for  
wireless shooting, the following information is exchanged between  
the flash units before the flash is discharged.  
Press the shutter release button fully.  
È
1 The flash directly connected to the camera emits a control flash  
(relays the flash mode of the camera).  
2 The wireless remote flash emits a test flash (relays confirmation  
of subject).  
3 The flash directly connected to the camera emits a control flash  
(relays flash output to the wireless remote flash).  
* The flash directly connected to the camera will emit a control flash one  
more time after this to relay the flash duration time when HSb (High-  
speed sync) is set.  
5
4 The wireless remote flash discharges at the same time as the  
main flash.  
When the wireless mode of the external flash directly connected to the  
camera is set to [MASTER] or [17. Flash in Wireless Mode] (p.166) is set  
to [On] for the built-in flash, all the flashes will discharge simultaneously.  
Red-Eye Reduction  
As with the built-in flash, the red-eye reduction function is available with an  
external flash. This may not be available on some flashes or may have  
restrictions for usage conditions. Refer to the chart on p.162.  
• The red-eye reduction function works even when only an external flash is  
used. (p.71)  
• If the red-eye reduction function of the built-in flash is used when the external  
flash is set as the slave unit or with the wireless function, the pre-flash for red-  
eye reduction will trigger the external flash. Do not use the red-eye reduction  
function when using a slave unit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
169  
Trailing Curtain Sync  
When using the built-in flash with an external flash (AF540FGZ or  
AF360FGZ) that is set to the Trailing Curtain Sync mode, the built-in flash  
will also use this mode. Confirm that both flash units are fully charged  
before shooting.  
Connecting an External Flash with an  
Extension Cord  
When using the built-in flash with an external flash that does not have a  
wireless flash mode function such as AF200FG, attach the Hot Shoe  
Adapter FG (optional) to the camera hot shoe and an Off-Camera Shoe  
Adapter F (optional) to the bottom of the external flash, and connect these  
with the Extension Cord F5P (optional) as shown in the illustration below.  
The Off-Camera Shoe Adapter F can be mounted to your tripod using the  
tripod screw.  
5
Only a P-TTL auto flash can be used in combination with the built-in flash.  
When combining with the built-in flash  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
170  
Multiple Flash Shooting Using Extension  
Cords  
You can combine two or more external flashes (AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ or  
AF200FG) or you can use two or more external flashes in combination with  
the built-in flash. You can use the extension cord connection terminal on  
the flash to connect the AF540FGZ. You can connect AF360FGZ or  
AF200FG units as shown in the illustration below. Connect an external  
flash and the Hot Shoe Adapter F (optional) to the Off-Camera Shoe  
Adapter F (optional) and then connect another Off-Camera Shoe Adapter  
F with external flash using the Extension Cord F5P (optional).  
Refer to the manual of the external flash for details.  
When combining two or more external flashes  
5
• Do not combine with accessories that have a different number of contacts  
such as a Hot Shoe Grip as a malfunction may occur.  
• Combining with flashes from other manufacturers may cause equipment  
breakdown. We recommend using the AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ or AF200FG.  
When using multiple external flashes or using an external flash with the built-in  
flash, P-TTL is used for flash control.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
171  
Contrast-Control-Sync Flash  
Combining two or more external flashes (AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ or  
AF200FG) or using an external flash in combination with the built-in flash  
allows multiple flash photography (contrast-control-sync flash  
photography). This is based on the difference between the amounts of  
light discharged from multiple units.  
• The AF200FG must be combined with the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ.  
• Do not combine with accessories that have a different number of contacts,  
such as a Hot Shoe Grip, as a malfunction may occur.  
• Combining with flashes from other manufacturers may cause equipment  
breakdown. We recommend using PENTAX automatic flashes.  
1
Connect the external flash to the camera indirectly.  
5
Refer to p.169.  
2
Set the sync mode for the external flash to contrast-  
control-sync mode.  
3
4
Set the mode dial to e, b, cor a.  
Confirm that both the external flash and built-in flash are  
fully charged and then take a picture.  
• When using two or more external flashes and the contrast-control-sync mode  
is set on the external master flash unit, the flash output ratio is 2 (master  
unit) : 1 (slave units). When an external flash is used in combination with the  
built-in flash, the flash output ratio is 2 (external flash) : 1 (built-in flash).  
• When using multiple external flashes or using an external flash with the built-  
in flash, P-TTL is used for flash control.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
172  
Memo  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 Shooting Settings  
This chapter describes how to set the save format for  
pictures taken and other settings.  
Setting the File Format ......................................174  
Setting the White Balance..................................182  
Correcting Images ..............................................189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
174  
Setting the File Format  
Setting the JPEG Recorded Pixels  
You can select the number of recorded pixels from E, J, P and i.  
The more pixels there are, the larger the picture and the bigger the file  
size. The file size will also differ according to the [JPEG Quality] setting.  
The default setting is E.  
Recorded Pixels  
Pixels  
Paper Size  
E
J
P
i
4288×2848  
3936×2624  
3072×2048  
1728×1152  
14"×17" / A2 paper  
10"×12" / A3 paper  
8"×10" / A4 paper  
5"×7" / A5 paper  
The paper sizes above are references for optimal printing by recorded  
pixels. The quality of the captured photo or printed picture depends on the  
quality level, exposure control, resolution of the printer and a variety of  
other factors.  
6
1
Press the M button in the status screen.  
The control panel appears.  
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.  
2
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to select [JPEG  
JPEG Recorded Pixels  
12M  
Recorded Pixels] and press the  
HDR  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
4 button.  
AF.A  
The [JPEG Recorded Pixels] screen  
JPEG  
12M  
appears.  
10/10/’09  
10:30AM  
[
]
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
175  
3
4
Use the four-way controller  
(45) to select the number of  
recorded pixels.  
128  
JPEG Recorded Pixels  
12M 10M  
6M  
2M  
When the number of recorded pixels is  
changed, the number of recordable  
images appears at the top right of the  
screen.  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Press the 4 button.  
The camera returns to the control panel.  
You can also change the setting from the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu (p.79).  
Setting the JPEG Quality Level  
6
You can set the image quality level. The file size will also differ according  
to the [JPEG Recorded Pixels] setting. The default setting is C(Best).  
C
D
E
Best  
Better  
Good  
Images will be clearer but file size will be larger.  
Images will be grainier but file size will be smaller.  
1
Press the M button in the status screen.  
The control panel appears.  
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
176  
2
3
4
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to select [JPEG  
Quality] and press the 4  
button.  
JPEG Quality  
HDR  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
AF.A  
The [JPEG Quality] screen appears.  
JPEG  
12M  
10/10/’09  
10:30AM  
[
]
37  
Use the four-way controller  
(45) to select a quality level.  
128  
JPEG Quality  
When the quality level is changed, the  
number of recordable images at that  
quality level appears at the top right of the  
screen.  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Press the 4 button.  
6
The camera returns to the control panel.  
You can also change the setting from the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu (p.79).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
177  
Setting the File Format  
You can set the format of image files.  
Captures images in JPEG format. You can change the number of  
recorded pixels in [JPEG Recorded Pixels], and the image quality level  
in [JPEG Quality]. The file size varies according to the settings. (default  
JPEG  
setting)  
RAW data is CMOS sensor output data saved without processing.  
Effects of White Balance, Custom Image and Color Space are not  
applied to the images, but they are saved as actual original information.  
RAW When you perform the development process by using RAW  
Development function (p.233), or using the provided software (PENTAX  
Digital Camera Utility 4) after transferring RAW data to a computer, you  
can create JPEG images with these effects.  
Images are saved in both RAW and JPEG formats. When [RAW Button  
Function] is assigned to the | (Green) button, you can press the |  
button to temporarily change the file format and save the image in both  
RAW+  
file formats. (p.180)  
6
When Digital Filter (p.140), HDR Capture (p.191) or Cross Processing (p.196)  
is set, the file format is fixed to [JPEG] and cannot be changed. To change the  
file format, turn these functions off.  
1
Press the M button in the status screen.  
The control panel appears.  
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.  
2
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to select [File Format]  
File Format  
JPEG  
and press the 4 button.  
HDR  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
The [File Format] screen appears.  
AF.A  
JPEG  
12M  
10/10/’09  
10:30AM  
[
]
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
178  
3
4
Use the four-way controller  
(45) to select a file format.  
128  
File Format  
JPEG  
When the file format is changed, the  
number of recordable images appears at  
the top right of the screen.  
RAW  
RAW+  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Press the 4 button.  
The camera returns to the control panel.  
• You can also change the setting from the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu (p.79).  
• The file format is fixed to [JPEG] in n (Stage Lighting) or l (Night Snap) of  
H (Scene) mode.  
Setting the RAW File Format  
You can select PEF or DNG format in [RAW  
File Format] of the [ARec. Mode 3] menu  
(p.79) when capturing images in RAW format.  
6
1
2
3
4
Movie  
Live View  
Status Screen  
Instant Review  
Color Space  
1sec.  
sRGB  
PEF  
RAW File Format  
DNG  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
PEF PENTAX’s original RAW file format (default setting)  
General-purpose, publicly available RAW file format designed by Adobe  
Systems  
DNG  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
179  
Setting the Green Button Function  
You can assign one of the following functions to the | (Green) button and  
access the function by simply pressing the button while shooting.  
Green Button  
Custom Image  
Optical Preview  
Resets the values being adjusted. (default setting)  
Sets the Custom Image settings. (p.194)  
Displays the Optical Preview. (p.126)  
Displays the Digital Preview. You can set whether or not to  
display the histogram and Bright/Dark Area warning during  
Digital Preview. (p.127)  
Digital Preview  
Digital Filter  
Displays the digital filter. (p.140)  
Temporarily changes the file format. By default,  
simultaneously saves the image in both JPEG and RAW  
format, regardless of the [File Format] setting. You can  
select whether the setting applies to only one image and the  
file format when the button is pressed. (p.180)  
RAW Button  
Function  
Returns AF point to the center of the AF frame if [Select AF  
Point] is set to S (Select) and the AF point has been  
changed. (p.118)  
Center AF Point  
6
1
Select [Green Button] in the  
[ARec. Mode 4] menu and press  
the four-way controller (5).  
1
2
4
3
Green Button  
Memory  
Shake Reduction  
Input Focal Length  
35mm  
The [Green Button] screen appears.  
MENU  
Exit  
2
Press the four-way controller  
(5).  
Green Button  
Green Button  
P LINE  
Action in M Mode  
e-dial in Program  
P SHIFT  
MENU  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
180  
3
4
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select a function to  
assign to the | button, and  
press the 4 button.  
Green Button  
Green Button  
Custom Image  
Optical Preview  
Digital Preview  
Digital Filter  
RAW RAW Button Function  
Center AF Point  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Press the 3 button twice.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.  
Setting the RAW Button Function  
When [RAW Button Function] is assigned to the | button, specify the  
function settings.  
1
Select [RAW Button Function] in Step 3 of “Setting the  
Green Button Function”.  
6
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Cancel after 1  
shot].  
Use the four-way controller  
Green Button  
(45) to select Oor P.  
RAW RAW Button Function  
Cancel after 1 shot  
JPEG  
RAW  
RAW+  
RAW+  
RAW+  
RAW+  
MENU  
The recording format returns to the original file format after a  
picture is taken. (default setting)  
O
P
The setting is canceled when the following operations are  
performed.  
- The | button is pressed again  
- The Q button or 3 button is pressed  
- The main switch is turned off  
- The mode dial is turned  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
181  
4
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to choose a file format.  
The left side is the [File Format] setting and the right side is the file format  
when the | button is pressed.  
Press the four-way controller (5),  
Green Button  
and use the four-way controller  
RAW RAW Button Function  
(23) to select a file format when  
Cancel after 1 shot  
the | button is pressed.  
JPEG  
RAW  
JPEG
RAW  
RAW+  
RAW+  
RAW+  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
6
7
Press the 4 button.  
Press the 3 button twice.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
182  
Setting the White Balance  
White balance is the function for adjusting the color of an image so that  
white objects appear white. Set the white balance if you are not satisfied  
with the color balance of pictures taken with white balance set to F  
(Auto), or to intentionally apply a creative effect to your images.  
Color  
Item  
Settings  
Temperature*1  
Automatically adjusts the white balance. Approx. 4,000  
(default setting) to 8,000K  
Auto  
F
Daylight  
For use when taking pictures in sunlight. Approx. 5,200K  
G
For use when taking pictures in the  
shade. It reduces the bluish color tones Approx. 8,000K  
in a picture.  
Shade  
Cloudy  
H
For use when taking pictures on cloudy  
Approx. 6,000K  
days.  
^
For use when taking pictures under  
fluorescent lighting. Select the type of  
fluorescent light.  
6
Fluorescent  
Light  
D
N
W
L
Fluorescent Light Daylight Color  
Fluorescent Light Daylight White  
Fluorescent Light Cool White  
Fluorescent Light Warm White  
Approx. 6,500K  
Approx. 5,000K  
Approx. 4,200K  
Approx. 3,000K  
J
For use when taking pictures under light  
bulb or other tungsten light. It reduces  
the reddish color tones in a picture.  
Tungsten  
Light  
Approx. 2,850K  
Approx. 5,400K  
I
For use when taking pictures using the  
built-in flash.  
Flash  
L
CTE  
Use this to keep and strengthen the  
color tone of the light source in the  
image.  
Use this to manually adjust the white  
balance according to the lighting so that  
white objects appear as a natural white.  
Manual  
K
*1 The color temperature (K) is an estimate. This does not indicate precise colors.  
*2 CTE= Color Temperature Enhancement  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
183  
1
Set the mode dial to e, K, b, c, or a.  
2
Press the four-way controller (4) in Capture mode.  
The [White Balance] screen appears.  
3
Press the four-way controller  
(23) to select the white balance.  
White Balance  
Auto  
CTE  
INFO  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
Check  
OK  
Available operations  
mcbutton  
You can use Digital Preview to preview the  
background image with the setting applied.  
M button  
Saves the background image. Select [Save as] and  
press the 4 button.  
6
4
Press the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
• White balance cannot be adjusted when Capture mode is set to Picture mode  
or H (Scene) mode, or when Cross Processing is set.  
• Because the light source changes when a flash discharges, you can set the  
white balance for when the flash discharges. Select [Auto White Balance],  
[Unchanged] or [Flash] in [8. WB When Using Flash] of the [A Custom  
Setting 2] menu (p.81).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
184  
Color Temperature  
The color of light shifts towards blue as the color temperature rises,  
and towards red as the color temperature falls. Color temperature  
describes this change in light color in terms of absolute temperature  
(K: Kelvin). This camera is capable of setting the white balance to  
enable taking pictures with natural coloring under a variety of lighting  
conditions.  
Red tint  
Blue tint  
[
]
2000  
3000  
4000 5000 6000  
8000 10000 12000  
K
6
Adjusting the White Balance Manually  
You can adjust the white balance depending on the light source when  
taking pictures. With the manual white balance, the camera can store  
delicate shades that cannot be precisely adjusted with the white balance  
preset values provided in the camera. This provides the optimum white  
balance for your surroundings.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
185  
1
Select Kin Step 3 on p.183 and  
press the four-way controller  
(5).  
White Balance  
Manual  
CTE  
OK  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
Check  
2
3
4
Under the light to measure the white balance, fully display  
a white sheet of paper in the viewfinder or select a white  
area as the subject.  
Press the shutter release button fully.  
Set the focus mode lever to \when the shutter cannot be released.  
The screen to select the measuring range is displayed.  
Use the e-dial to select the entire  
screen or spot area for the  
measuring range.  
6
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
5
When a spot area is selected, use  
the four-way controller (2345)  
to move the frame to the position  
you want to measure.  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
186  
6
Press the 4 button.  
Manual  
White Balance  
The white balance fine-tuning screen  
appears when measuring is completed.  
Adjust the white balance as necessary.  
SHUTTER  
Adjust  
G
B
A
0
0
0
M
INFO  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
Check  
OK  
7
Press the 4 button.  
The camera returns to the [White Balance] screen.  
8
Press the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
• No image is recorded when the shutter release button is pressed to adjust  
the white balance.  
• The message [The operation could not be completed correctly] appears  
when measuring is unsuccessful. Press the 4 button while displayed to  
remeasure the white balance.  
6
• If the picture is extremely overexposed or underexposed, the white balance  
may not be adjusted. In this case, adjust to the proper exposure before  
adjusting the white balance.  
• When the mode dial is set to C (Movie), the white balance cannot be  
measured. Adjust the white balance in any capture mode other than C  
before recording a movie.  
Fine-Tuning the White Balance  
You can fine-tune the white balance settings.  
1
Perform the desired setting in Step 3 on p.183.  
2
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The fine-tuning screen appears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
187  
3
Fine-tune the white balance.  
Shade  
Seven levels (225 patterns) are available  
on the G-M and B-A axes.  
G
B
A
G1  
0
0
M
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
Check  
OK  
Available operations  
Four-way controller (23)  
Four-way controller (45)  
| (Green) button  
Adjusts the tone of the colors between  
green (G) and magenta (M).  
Adjusts the tone of the colors between  
blue (B) and amber (A).  
Resets the adjustment value. (Available  
only when [Green Button] is assigned to |  
(Green) button in [Green Button] of the [A  
Rec. Mode 4] menu (p.179).)  
4
5
Press the 4 button.  
6
The camera returns to the [White Balance] screen.  
Press the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
When set to K, the white balance can also be measured in the fine-tuning  
screen by pressing the shutter release button fully (except while recording a  
movie).  
Setting the Color Space  
You can set the color space to use.  
Sets to sRGB color space. (default setting)  
Sets to AdobeRGB color space.  
sRGB  
AdobeRGB  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
188  
Set [Color Space] in the [ARec. Mode 3]  
1
2
3
4
menu (p.80).  
Movie  
Live View  
Status Screen  
Instant Review  
Color Space  
1sec.  
sRGB  
AdobeRGB  
RAW File Format  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
File names differ depending on the color space setting as shown below.  
For sRGB: IMGPxxxx.JPG  
For AdobeRGB: _IGPxxxx.JPG  
“xxxx” indicates the file number. This is displayed as a four-digit sequential  
number. (p.252)  
Color Space  
Color ranges for various input/output devices, such as digital  
cameras, monitors, and printers, differ. This color range is called the  
Color Space.  
To recreate different color spaces in different devices, standard color  
spaces have been proposed. This camera supports sRGB and  
AdobeRGB.  
6
sRGB is mainly used for devices such as a computer.  
AdobeRGB covers a wider range of color than sRGB and is used for  
occupational uses such as industrial printing.  
An image created in AdobeRGB may appear lighter than an image  
created in sRGB when output from an sRGB compatible device.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
189  
Correcting Images  
The camera and lens properties can be automatically adjusted when  
taking pictures.  
Adjusting the Brightness  
Adjusts the brightness and prevents bright and dark areas from occurring.  
Highlight Correction  
Expands the dynamic range and the light level expressed by the CMOS  
sensor and prevents bright areas from occurring.  
1
Press the M button in the status screen.  
The control panel appears.  
6
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select [Highlight  
Correction] and press the 4 button.  
The [Highlight Correction] screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller (45)  
Highlight Correction  
to select [Off] or [On].  
Off  
DR  
200  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
4
Press the 4 button.  
The camera returns to the control panel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
190  
• When [Highlight Correction] is set to [On], the minimum sensitivity is set to  
ISO 400. If [3. Expanded Sensitivity] in the [A Custom Setting 1] menu (p.81)  
is set to [On], the sensitivity is set to ISO 200.  
• When Capture mode is set to n (Stage Lighting) or l (Night Snap) of H  
(Scene) mode, [Highlight Correction] is fixed to [On].  
Shadow Correction  
Expands the dynamic range and the light level expressed by the CMOS  
sensor and prevents dark areas from occurring.  
1
Press the M button in the status screen.  
The control panel appears.  
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select [Shadow  
Correction] and press the 4 button.  
6
The [Shadow Correction] screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller (45)  
Shadow Correction  
to select [Off], [Low], [Medium] or  
Off  
[High].  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
4
Press the 4 button.  
The camera returns to the control panel.  
You can also set Highlight Correction and Shadow Correction in [D-Range  
Setting] of the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu (p.79).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
191  
HDR Capture  
Enables capturing images at high dynamic range. Takes three frames  
(underexposed, standard (proper exposure) and overexposed) to create a  
single composite image with them.  
1
Press the M button in the status screen.  
The control panel appears.  
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select [HDR  
Capture] and press the 4 button.  
The [HDR Capture] screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller (45)  
HDR Capture  
to select [Off], [Standard] or  
Off  
[Strong].  
HDR  
OFF  
HDR  
1
HDR  
2
6
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
4
Press the 4 button.  
The camera returns to the control panel.  
• When HDR Capture is set, the file format is always set to [JPEG] and cannot  
be changed. You cannot use HDR Capture when the file format is set to  
[RAW].  
• When HDR Capture is set, Multi-exposure is not available. Also, the drive  
modes other than 9 (Single Frame Shooting) and h (Remote Control) are  
not available.  
• HDR Capture cannot be used with Cross Processing or Digital Filter at the  
same time. The mode set last is used.  
• You cannot use HDR Capture when the shutter speed is set to h.  
• During HDR Capture, multiple frames are combined together to create a  
single image, so it will take time to save an image.  
• During HDR Capture, pressing the 3 button while an image is being  
saved cancels the process and saves the image as a standard image.  
• The Shake Reduction function is automatically turned off when HDR Capture  
is set. In this case, use a tripod to prevent camera shake.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
192  
You can also change the setting from the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu (p.79).  
Lens Correction  
Reduces distortions and lateral chromatic aberrations occurring due to  
lens properties.  
 Distortion  
Distortion is the phenomenon in which the center of the image appears  
inflated (barrel distortion) or the center of the image appears pinched  
(pincushion distortion). Distortion occurs more easily when using a  
zoom lens or a lens with a small aperture, and straight walls or the  
horizon in the image appear curved.  
6
Pincushion distortion  
Barrel distortion  
 Lateral chromatic aberration  
Lateral chromatic aberration is the phenomenon in which the  
magnification of the image varies according to the colors (wavelengths  
of light) when a picture was taken, and may cause a blurred image.  
Chromatic aberration occurs more easily at shorter focal lengths.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
193  
• Corrections can only be made when using a DA, DA L or D FA lens.  
[Distortion Correction] and [Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj] cannot be selected when  
an incompatible lens is attached.  
• [Distortion Correction] is disabled when using a DA FISH-EYE 10-17mm.  
• The Lens Correction function is disabled when using an accessory such as a  
close-up ring or rear converter that is attached between the camera and the  
lens.  
• The shooting speed for continuous shooting may be slower when the Lens  
Correction function is activated.  
• The effects of Lens Correction function may be barely noticeable in some  
cases due to the shooting conditions or other factors.  
1
Press the M button in the status screen.  
The control panel appears.  
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.  
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select [Distortion  
Correction] or [Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj] and press the 4  
button.  
The [Distortion Correction] or [Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj] screen appears.  
6
3
4
Use the four-way controller (45)  
to select [Off] or [On].  
Distortion Correction  
Off  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Press the 4 button.  
The camera returns to the control panel.  
• When a compatible lens is attached and the file format is set to [RAW] or  
[RAW+], the correction information is saved as a RAW file parameter and you  
can select [On] or [Off] when developing the RAW images. (p.236)  
• You can also set [Distortion Correction] and [Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj] in [Lens  
Correction] of the [ARec. Mode 1] menu (p.79).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
194  
Setting the Image Finishing Tone  
Setting Custom Image  
You can set the image finishing tone before shooting when the capture  
mode is set to e(Program), K (Sensitivity Priority), b(Shutter Priority),  
c(Aperture Priority) or a(Manual).  
Select from the following seven modes for Image Tone: Bright (default  
setting), Natural, Portrait, Landscape, Vibrant, Muted and Monochrome.  
You can adjust the following items for Image Tone.  
Item  
Saturation*1  
Settings  
Sets the color saturation. (Available settings: -4 to +4)  
Sets the color. (Available settings: -4 to +4)  
Changes the brightness of the image. (Available settings: -4  
to +4)  
High/Low Key Adj  
Contrast  
Sets the image contrast. (Available settings: -4 to +4)  
6
Sets the sharpness of the image outlines. (Available settings:  
-4 to +4)  
Sharpness*2  
Changes the contrast to appear as if a B&W color filter was  
used. Sets the filter color. (Available settings: [None],  
[Green], [Yellow], [Orange], [Red], [Magenta], [Blue], [Cyan],  
[Infrared Filter])  
Filter Effect*3  
Toning*3  
Sets the level for cold tone adjustment (- direction) and warm  
tone adjustment (+ direction). (Available settings: -4 to +4)  
*1 This can be set when any mode other than [Monochrome] is selected.  
*2 You can also change the setting to [Fine Sharpness], which makes image outlines even  
thinner and sharper.  
*3 This can be set when [Monochrome] is selected.  
Custom Image cannot be used when Cross Processing is set.  
1
Press the M button in the status screen.  
The control panel appears.  
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
195  
2
3
4
Use the four way controller  
(2345) to select a custom  
image and press the 4 button.  
Custom Image  
Bright  
HDR  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
The [Custom Image] screen appears.  
AF.A  
After the power is turned on, the last  
image taken is displayed in the  
background.  
JPEG  
12M  
10/10/’09  
10:30AM  
[
]
37  
Use the four-way controller (45)  
to select an image tone.  
Bright  
R
M
B
Y
G
C
F
INFO  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
Check  
OK  
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to choose an item you want to  
change.  
6
Portrait  
R
M
Y
When Image Tone is set to  
B
G
[Monochrome], you can change the  
settings for Filter Effect, Toning, Contrast,  
and Sharpness.  
C
F
INFO  
Check  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
196  
5
Use the four-way controller (45) to change the setting.  
The background image changes according to the settings.  
You can visually check the saturation and hue with the radar chart. (This  
is not displayed when Image Tone is set to [Monochrome].)  
Available operations  
e-dial  
Switches between [Sharpness] and [Fine  
Sharpness]. When set to [Fine Sharpness], image  
outlines can be captured with more detail.  
| (Green) button  
Resets the set value. (Available only when [Green  
Button] is assigned to the | (Green) button in  
[Green Button] of the [ARec. Mode 4] menu  
(p.179).)  
M button  
Saves the background image. Select [Save as] and  
press the 4 button. (Not available during Live  
View.)  
6
Press the 4 button.  
The camera returns to the control panel.  
6
You can also change the settings from the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu (p.79).  
Setting Cross Processing  
Cross processing is the procedure of deliberately processing a film in the  
wrong type of chemicals to create an image with different colors and  
contrast. This camera features digital cross processing, which is done  
internally.  
1
Press the M button in the status screen.  
The control panel appears.  
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
197  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select [Cross  
Processing] and press the 4 button.  
The [Cross Processing] screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller (45)  
Cross Processing  
to select [Off] or [On].  
Off  
OFF  
ON  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
4
Press the 4 button.  
The camera returns to the control panel.  
• When Cross Processing is set, the file format is fixed to [JPEG] and cannot  
be changed. When the file format is set to [RAW], Cross Processing cannot  
be selected.  
• When Cross Processing is set, Multi-exposure cannot be selected.  
• Cross Processing and HDR Capture cannot be used at the same time. The  
function set last is used.  
6
• When Cross Processing is set, settings for Custom Image and White Balance  
cannot be changed.  
You can also change the setting from the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu (p.79).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
198  
Memo  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 Playback Functions  
This chapter describes how to use the various playback  
functions in Playback mode.  
Playback Functions Operation .........................200  
Enlarging Images ...............................................202  
Displaying Multiple Images ...............................204  
Slideshow ...........................................................210  
Rotating Images .................................................213  
Comparing Images .............................................214  
Deleting Multiple Images ...................................215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
200  
Playback Functions Operation  
Perform settings related to playing back images in the playback mode  
palette or [Q Playback] menu.  
For details on how to operate the menus, see “Using the Menus” (p.35).  
Playback Mode Palette Setting Items  
Press the four-way controller (3) in  
Playback mode to display the playback  
mode palette.  
You can display the playback mode palette  
even when a movie is paused.  
Slideshow  
7
Plays a slideshow with  
all captured images  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Item  
Function  
Page  
s
Image Rotation  
Rotates images.  
Changes the color tone of images, adds  
softening and slimming effects, or  
adjusts the brightness.  
D
Digital Filter*1  
Resize*1  
Changes the number of recorded pixels  
and quality level and saves it as a new  
image.  
n
Cuts out only the desired area of the  
picture and saves it as a new image.  
o
u
Cropping  
Slideshow  
Plays back the images one after another. p.211  
Converts RAW images to JPEG format. p.233  
h RAW Development*2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
201  
Item  
Function  
Page  
Joins a number of images together and  
creates a new image from them.  
p Index  
g Image Comparison  
Displays two images side-by-side.  
Protects images from being accidentally  
erased.  
Z Protect  
r
DPOF*1  
Sets the DPOF settings.  
*1 This cannot be performed when a RAW image is displayed.  
*2 This cannot be performed when a JPEG image is displayed.  
Playback Menu Setting Items  
You can perform the following settings in the  
[Q Playback ] menu.  
Press the 3 button in Playback mode to  
display the [Q Playback 1] menu.  
7
Menu  
Item  
Slideshow  
Function  
Page  
Plays back the images one after another.  
You can set how images will be displayed p.210  
in the slideshow.  
Sets whether to display the Bright/Dark  
Area warning in Playback mode and also  
sets the initial magnification when  
Q1  
Playback Display  
Method  
enlarging images.  
Delete All Images  
You can delete all saved images at once. p.218  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
202  
Enlarging Images  
Images can be magnified up to 16 times in Playback mode.  
1
Use the four-way controller (45)  
to select an image in Playback  
mode.  
1/2000 F5.6  
100-0001  
JPEG  
2
Turn the e-dial to the right  
(toward y).  
The image enlarges at each click (1.2  
times to 16 times).  
x2.4  
7
Available operations  
Four-way controller (2345)  
e-dial to the right (y)  
e-dial to the left (f)  
4 button  
Moves the area to enlarge.  
Enlarges image (up to 16 times).  
Reduces image (up to 1.2 times*).  
Returns to the original size.  
M button  
Switches information display On/Off.  
* The default setting for the first click (minimum magnification) is 1.2 times. You can  
change this in [Playback Display Method] of the [Q Playback 1] menu. (p.203)  
• You can enlarge the image by following the same procedure during Instant  
Review (p.63), Digital Preview (p.127) or Live View (p.147).  
• The initial full display of vertical images is displayed with a magnification of  
0.75 times that of horizontal images, therefore, magnification at the first click  
starts at 1.0 times.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
203  
Setting the Playback Display Method  
You can set whether or not to display the Bright/Dark Area warning in  
Playback mode and set the initial magnification when enlarging images.  
1
Select [Playback Display Method] in the [Q Playback 1]  
menu and press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Playback Display Method] screen appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller (45)  
to select Oor Pfor [Bright/Dark  
Area].  
Playback Display Method  
Bright/Dark Area  
Quick Zoom  
Off  
MENU  
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Quick Zoom].  
Press the four-way controller (5)  
Playback Display Method  
and use the four-way controller  
7
Bright/Dark Area  
Quick Zoom  
Off  
X2  
(23) to select the magnification.  
X4  
X8  
X16  
Select from [Off] (default setting), [×2],  
[×4], [×8] or [×16].  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
5
6
Press the 4 button.  
Press the 3 button twice.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
204  
Displaying Multiple Images  
Multi-image Display Screen  
You can display 4, 9, 16 or 36 images on the monitor at the same time.  
The default setting is nine image-display.  
1
Turn the e-dial to the left (toward  
f) in Playback mode.  
The multi-image display screen  
appears.  
Frame  
Up to nine thumbnail images will be  
displayed at once.  
7
INFO  
100-0001  
Scroll bar  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
205  
Available operations  
Four-way controller  
Moves the selection frame  
(2345)  
M button  
Displays the [Multi-img Display Setting] screen. Use  
the four-way controller (45) to select the number of  
images to display at the same time.  
Multi-img Display Setting  
Display Type  
OK  
MENU  
INFO  
Cancel  
OK  
([Display Type] cannot be selected when developing  
multiple RAW images (p.234).)  
K/ibutton  
Selects multiple images and deletes them. (p.215)  
2
Press the 4 button.  
A full screen display of the selected  
image appears.  
7
1/2000 F5.6  
100-0001  
JPEG  
Displaying Images by Folder  
Images will be grouped and displayed by the folder in which they are  
saved.  
1
In the multi-image display  
screen, turn the e-dial to the left  
(toward f) again.  
The folder display screen appears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
206  
2
3
Select the folder you want to  
display.  
12345  
102  
100  
103  
101  
104  
105  
_
100 0105  
Available operations  
Four-way controller (2345)  
Moves the selection frame.  
K/ibutton  
Deletes the selected folder and all  
the images in it. (p.216)  
Press the 4 button.  
The multi-image display screen for the selected folder appears.  
Displaying Images by Shooting Date (Calendar  
Display)  
Images will be grouped and displayed by shooting date.  
7
1
In the multi-image display  
screen, press the M button.  
The [Multi-img Display Setting] screen  
appears.  
Number of images shot on this date  
2
Press the M button again.  
The calendar display screen appears.  
2/5  
2009.  
WED  
FRI  
9
23  
25  
28  
Only the dates when pictures were taken  
are displayed.  
MON  
2009.10  
THU  
SUN  
WED  
SAT  
1
4
7
10  
INFO  
Delete  
Shooting date  
Thumbnail  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
207  
Available operations  
Four-way controller (23)  
Selects a shooting date.  
Four-way controller (45)  
Selects an image taken on the selected  
shooting date.  
e-dial to the right (y)  
M button  
Displays the selected image. Turn to the left  
(f) to return to calendar display.  
The camera returns to the multi-image  
display screen.  
K/ibutton  
Deletes selected images.  
3
Press the 4 button.  
A full screen display of the selected image appears.  
Joining Multiple Images (Index)  
Join a number of images together and display them as an index print. You  
can also save the displayed index print as a new image. You can select  
the images to include in the index print and have them randomly-arranged.  
7
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in Playback mode.  
The playback mode palette appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select p (Index)  
and press the 4 button.  
The [Index] screen appears.  
3
4
Press the four-way controller (5).  
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select a layout and press the  
Index  
Layout  
Images  
Backgrnd.  
4 button.  
You can select o (Thumbnail),  
p (Square), q (Random1),  
r (Random2), s (Random3) or  
p (Bubble).  
Selection  
Create an image  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
208  
5
6
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Images] and  
press the four-way controller (5).  
Use the four-way controller (23)  
Index  
to select the number of images  
Layout  
12  
24  
Images  
Backgrnd.  
and press the 4 button.  
You can select 12, 24 or 36 images.  
Selection 36  
Create an image  
Cancel  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
7
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Backgrnd.]  
and press the four-way controller (5).  
8
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select the background color  
Index  
Layout  
12  
Images  
Backgrnd.  
Selection  
and press the 4 button.  
You can select a white or black  
background.  
Create an image  
7
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
9
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Selection] and  
press the four-way controller (5).  
10 Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select the type of image  
selection and press the 4  
button.  
Index  
Layout  
Images  
Backgrnd.  
Selection  
12  
Create an image  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
209  
Picks images automatically from all of the images  
saved.  
u
w
(All images)  
(Manual)  
Individually select the images you want to include in  
the index. Continue by selecting [Select image(s)]  
and selecting the individual images.  
Picks images automatically from the folder  
x
(Folder name) selected. Continue by selecting [Select a folder] and  
selecting the folder.  
11 Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select [Create an image] and  
press the 4 button.  
Index  
Layout  
Images  
Backgrnd.  
Selection  
12  
The index image is created and a  
confirmation screen appears.  
Create an image  
MENU  
12 Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select [Save] or [Reshuffle]  
and press the 4 button.  
Save  
Reshuffle  
Cancel  
7
OK  
MENU  
OK  
Save  
The index image is saved as a P and Cfile.  
Reselects the images included in the index and displays a  
new index image. However, if [Thumbnail] is selected for  
[Layout], this is not displayed.  
Reshuffle  
After the index image is saved, the camera returns to Playback mode  
and the index image is displayed.  
• Processing may take a while when creating an index image.  
• When the number of saved images is smaller than the number set for  
[Images], empty spaces will appear in [Thumbnail] layout and some images  
may be duplicated in other layouts.  
• The images are positioned in order starting from the smallest file number  
when [Thumbnail] or [Square] is selected.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
210  
Slideshow  
You can play back all images saved on your SD Memory Card  
successively.  
Setting the Slideshow Display  
Sets how images will be displayed during the Slideshow.  
1
Press the 3 button in Playback mode.  
The [Q Playback 1] menu appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Slideshow]  
and press the four-way controller (5).  
The screen to make the slideshow settings appears.  
3
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select the item you want to  
Slideshow starts  
7
change.  
Start  
Interval  
Screen Effect  
Repeat Playback  
3sec.  
The following items can be changed.  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
Item  
Description  
Setting  
Select the image display  
interval.  
3sec. (default setting)/  
5sec./10sec./30sec.  
Interval  
Screen  
Effect  
Select the transition effect when Off (default setting)/Fade/  
the next image is displayed.  
Wipe/Stripe  
Set whether to start the  
slideshow again from the  
beginning after the last image is  
displayed.  
Repeat  
Playback  
P(default setting)/O  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
211  
4
1
Press the four-way controller (5)  
and use the four-way controller  
(23) to change the setting.  
Start  
Interval  
3sec.  
5sec.  
Screen Effect  
Repeat Playback  
10sec.  
30sec.  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Starting the Slideshow  
Select [Start] in Step 3 on p.210  
and press the 4 button.  
Or, select u (Slideshow) in the  
playback mode palette and press  
the 4 button.  
Start  
OK  
The start screen is displayed and the  
slideshow begins.  
Available operations  
7
4 button  
Pauses playback. Press again to resume  
playback.  
Four-way controller (4)  
Four-way controller (5)  
Four-way controller (3)  
Shows the previous image.  
Shows the next image.  
Stops playback.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
212  
2
Stop the slideshow.  
Slideshow ends when one of the following operations is performed  
during playback or when paused.  
- The four-way controller (3) is pressed  
- The Q button is pressed  
- The 3 button is pressed  
- The shutter release button is pressed halfway or fully  
- The mode dial is turned  
- The =/L button is pressed  
*1 After slideshow ends, the camera switches to normal Playback mode.  
*2 After slideshow ends, the camera switches to Capture mode.  
For movies, only the first frame is displayed and then the next image is  
displayed after the set interval has elapsed. To play a movie during a  
slideshow, press the 4 button while the first frame is displayed. After the  
movie has finished playing, the slideshow will resume.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
213  
Rotating Images  
You can rotate the image displayed 90° counterclockwise at a time and  
save the rotated image. The image rotation information is saved with the  
image and during playback it will be displayed in portrait orientation.  
• When [18. Saving Rotation Info] in the [A Custom Setting 3] menu (p.82) is  
set to [Off], the image rotation information is not saved when shooting.  
• When [19. Auto Image Rotation] in the [A Custom Setting 3] menu (p.82) is  
set to [On], the image is automatically rotated during playback according to  
the image rotation information.  
You cannot change the image rotation information in the following conditions.  
- When the image is protected  
- When the image rotation information is not saved with the image  
- When [19. Auto Image Rotation] in the [A Custom Setting 3] menu (p.82) is  
set to [Off]  
1
Select the image you want to rotate in Playback mode.  
2
Press the four-way controller (3).  
7
The playback mode palette appears.  
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select s (Image  
Rotation) and press the 4 button.  
The selected image is rotated in 90° increments and the four thumbnail  
images are displayed.  
4
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to select the rotation  
direction and press the 4  
button.  
The image rotation information is saved.  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
214  
Comparing Images  
You can display two images side-by-side.  
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in Playback mode.  
The playback mode palette appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select g (Image  
Comparison) and press the 4 button.  
The last image displayed will be displayed twice side-by-side.  
3
Select two images you want to  
compare using the e-dial and  
compare them at left and right.  
100-0001  
100-0001  
You can perform the following operations  
while comparing the images.  
OK  
MENU  
Available operations  
7
4 button  
Moves the selection frame to the right image, both  
images, and left image each time the button is pressed.  
Four-way controller  
(2345)  
Moves the area to enlarge. When the selection  
frame is placed on both images, you can manipulate  
both images at the same time.  
| (Green) button  
Returns the enlarge display position to the center.  
e-dial  
When the selection frame is placed on the left or  
right image, the previous or next image is displayed.  
When the selection frames are placed on both  
images, you can enlarge or reduce both images  
simultaneously in the same magnification.  
M button  
Switches information display On/Off.  
K/ibutton  
When the selection frame is placed on the left or  
right image, the selected image is deleted.  
4
Press the 3 button.  
The camera returns to the normal playback mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
215  
Deleting Multiple Images  
Deleting Selected Images  
You can delete multiple images in the multi-image display at once.  
Deleted images cannot be restored.  
• Protected images cannot be deleted.  
• You can select up to 100 images at a time.  
1
Turn the e-dial to the left (toward  
f) in Playback mode.  
The multi-image display screen appears.  
7
2
3
Press the K/ibutton.  
The screen to select the images to delete  
is displayed.  
INFO  
100-0001  
Select the images to delete.  
OK  
MENU  
Delete  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
216  
Available operations  
Four-way controller  
Moves the selection frame  
(2345)  
4 button  
Adds Oand selects an image. Press again to return  
to P. Protected images (Z) cannot be selected.  
e-dial  
Displays a full screen display of the image selected  
with the selection frame. When the image is  
displayed full screen, press the four-way controller  
(45) to display the previous or next image.  
4
5
Press the K/ibutton.  
The delete confirmation screen appears.  
Press the four-way controller (2)  
to select [Select & Delete].  
All selected images will  
be deleted  
Select & Delete  
Cancel  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
7
6
Press the 4 button.  
The selected images are deleted.  
Deleting a Folder  
You can delete the selected folder and all the images in it.  
1
Turn the e-dial two clicks to the  
left (toward f) in Playback  
mode.  
The folder display screen appears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
217  
2
3
4
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to select a folder to  
delete and press the K/i  
button.  
12345  
102  
100  
103  
101  
104  
105  
The delete folder confirmation screen  
appears.  
_
100 0105  
Press the four-way controller (2)  
to select [Delete].  
_
100 0105  
All images in selected  
folder will be deleted  
Delete  
Cancel  
OK  
OK  
Press the 4 button.  
The folder and all images in it are deleted.  
The confirmation screen appears when  
there are protected images. Use the four-  
way controller (23) to select [Delete All]  
or [Leave All] and press the 4 button.  
7
3image(s)  
Protected images are found  
When [Delete All] is selected, protected  
images are also deleted.  
Delete All  
Leave All  
OK  
OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
218  
Deleting All Images  
You can delete all saved images at once.  
Deleted images cannot be restored.  
1
Select [Delete All Images] in the [Q Playback 1] menu  
and press the four-way controller (5).  
The confirmation screen for deleting all images is displayed.  
2
Press the four-way controller (2)  
to select [Delete All Images].  
All images will be deleted  
from memory  
Delete All Images  
Cancel  
OK  
OK  
3
Press the 4 button.  
7
All images are deleted.  
The confirmation screen appears when  
there are protected images. Use the four-  
way controller (23) to select [Delete All]  
or [Leave All] and press the 4 button.  
3image(s)  
Protected images are found  
When [Delete All] is selected, protected  
images are also deleted.  
Delete All  
Leave All  
OK  
OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
219  
Protecting Images from Deletion  
(Protect)  
You can protect images from being accidentally deleted.  
Even protected images are deleted if the inserted SD Memory Card is  
formatted.  
Protecting a Single Image  
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in Playback mode.  
The playback mode palette appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select  
Z(Protect) and press the 4 button.  
The screen to select the Protect setting method is displayed.  
3
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [Single Image]  
and press the 4 button.  
7
Single Image  
All Images  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
4
5
Use the four-way controller (45) to select an image to  
protect.  
Press the four-way controller (2)  
100-0105  
to select [Protect].  
Select [Unprotect] to cancel the  
protection of the image.  
Protect  
Unprotect  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
220  
6
Press the 4 button.  
The image is protected and the Y icon appears at the top right of the  
screen.  
Repeat Steps 4 to 6 to protect other images.  
Protecting All Images  
1
Select [All Images] in Step 3 on p.219 and press the 4  
button.  
2
Press the four-way controller (2)  
to select [Protect] and press the  
Protects all images  
4 button.  
All images saved on the SD Memory Card  
are protected.  
Protect  
Unprotect  
Select [Unprotect] to cancel the  
protection of all images.  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
221  
Connecting the Camera to an AV  
Device  
You can connect the camera to a TV or other device with a video IN jack  
and play back images. Use the optional AV cable (I-AVC7).  
1
Turn the AV device and camera off.  
2
Open the terminal cover, face the arrow on the AV cable  
toward the 2mark on the camera, and connect the cable  
to the PC/AV terminal.  
7
3
4
Connect the other end of the AV cable to the video IN jack  
on the AV device.  
Turn the AV device and camera on.  
The camera turns on in video mode, and the camera information is  
displayed on the screen of the connected AV device.  
• If you intend to use the camera continuously for a long period, use of the AC  
adapter kit K-AC84 (optional) is recommended. (p.42)  
• For an AV device with multiple video IN jacks, check the operating manual of  
the AV device, and select a suitable video IN jack for connecting the camera.  
• The camera monitor turns off while the camera is connected to the AV  
device. You cannot adjust the volume on the camera. Adjust the volume on  
the AV device.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
222  
Selecting the Video Output Format  
When the hometown is set at the time of initial setting (p.52), the video  
output format is set in accordance with that region. Depending on the  
country or region, images may fail to be played back with the set video  
output format. If this happens, change the video output format setting.  
1
Select [Video Out] in the [R Set-up 2] menu and press the  
four-way controller (5).  
2
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select [NTSC] or [PAL].  
1
2
3
4
Brightness Level  
0
LCD Color Tuning  
Video Out  
NTSC  
PAL  
USB Connection  
Folder Name  
Date  
Copyright Information  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
3
4
Press the 4 button.  
7
Press the 3 button.  
The video output format is set.  
The video output format differs depending on the region. When you set [Setting  
the Time] in the World Time setting (p.244) to X (Destination), the video output  
setting changes to the video output format for that city.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
8 Processing Images  
This chapter describes how to process pictures taken and  
edit RAW images.  
Changing the Image Size ...................................224  
Developing RAW Images ...................................233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
224  
Changing the Image Size  
Changes the number of recorded pixels and quality level of the image, and  
saves the image as a new file.  
Changing the Number of Recorded Pixels and  
Quality Level (Resize)  
Changes the number of recorded pixels and quality level of the selected  
image and saves it as a new image. The number of recorded pixels can be  
reduced while still obtaining an image with good quality.  
• Only JPEG files captured with this camera can be resized.  
• You cannot select a larger resolution than that of the original image.  
• Images resized to Z with this camera cannot be resized.  
1
Select an image to resize in Playback mode.  
2
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The playback mode palette appears.  
3
4
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select  
n (Resize) and press the 4 button.  
8
The screen to select the recorded pixels and quality level appears.  
Use the four-way controller (45)  
to select a size.  
You can select one of the image sizes  
starting from one size smaller than that of  
the original image. The selectable sizes  
differ according to the original image size  
and aspect ratio.  
12M  
10M  
MENU  
OK  
5
Press the four-way controller (3) and use the four-way  
controller (45) to select the quality level.  
You can select C, Dor E.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
225  
6
7
Press the 4 button.  
The save confirmation screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [Save as].  
Saves tthe imagge as a nneew file  
Save as  
Cancel  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
8
Press the 4 button.  
The resized image is saved as a new image.  
Cutting Out Part of the Image (Cropping)  
Cuts out only the desired area of the selected image and saves it as a new  
image. The aspect ratio can also be changed.  
• Only JPEG and RAW files captured with this camera can be cropped.  
• Images resized to j or Z with this camera cannot be cropped.  
8
1
Select an image to crop in Playback mode.  
2
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The playback mode palette appears.  
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select  
o (Cropping) and press the 4 button.  
The cropping frame to specify the size and position of the area to crop  
appears on the screen.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
226  
4
Specify the size and position of  
the area to crop by using  
cropping frame.  
MENU  
OK  
INFO  
3:2  
Available operations  
e-dial  
Changes the size of the cropping frame.  
Moves the cropping frame.  
Four-way controller  
(2345)  
M button  
Changes the aspect ratio. Select from [3:2],  
[4:3], [16:9] or [1:1]. The image can also be  
rotated from -45° to +45° in increments of 1°.  
3:2  
0°  
Aspect Ratio  
Image Rotation  
MENU  
| (Green) button  
Rotates the cropping frame in 90° increments.  
| appears only when the cropping frame can  
be rotated.  
8
5
6
Press the 4 button.  
The save confirmation screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select [Save as].  
Saves tthe imagge as a nneew file  
Save as  
Cancel  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
7
Press the 4 button.  
The cropped image is saved as a new image.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
227  
Processing Images with Digital  
Filters  
You can edit captured images using digital filters.  
The following filters are available.  
Filter name  
Effect  
Parameter  
Shading Level: +1/+2/+3  
Creates an image that  
Toy Camera looks as though it was Blur: +1/+2/+3  
shot with a toy camera.  
Tone Break: Red/Green/Blue/Yellow  
Toning: -3 to +3  
Creates an image with  
the look of an old photo.  
Retro  
Frame Composite: None/Thin/Medium/  
Thick  
Enhances the contrast  
in the image.  
High Contrast  
+1 to +5  
Extracts a specific color Color: Red/Magenta/Blue/Cyan/Green/  
and makes the rest of Yellow  
Extract Color  
the image black and  
Color Freq. Range: -2 to +2  
white.  
Creates an image that Intensity: Weak/Standard/Strong  
looks as though it was  
Water Color  
Pastel  
Saturation: Low/Medium/High  
painted.  
Creates an image that  
looks as though it was Weak/Standard/Strong  
drawn with a crayon.  
8
Blurs part of the image  
Miniature  
to create a fake  
miniature scene.  
Front/Middle/Back  
Brightness: ±8 levels  
Saturation: ±3 levels  
Hue: ±3 levels  
Base  
Parameter  
Adj  
Adjusts the parameters  
to create the desired  
image.  
Contrast: ±3 levels  
Sharpness: ±3 levels  
Createsamonochrome Filter Effect: OFF/Red/Green/Blue/IR  
Monochrome image such as a black-  
and-white photo.  
Toning (B-A): 7 levels  
Adds a color filter to the Color: Red/Magenta/Cyan/Blue/Green/  
image. Select from 18 Yellow  
Color  
filters (6 colors × 3  
Color Density: Light/Standard/Dark  
tones).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
228  
Filter name  
Soft  
Effect  
Parameter  
Creates an image with Soft Focus: +1/+2/+3  
a soft focus throughout  
Shadow Blur: OFF/ON  
the image.  
For taking pictures of  
Effect Density: Small/Medium/Large  
night scenes or lights  
reflected on water with  
a special sparkling look  
achieved by adding  
cross-like effects to the  
picture’s highlights.  
Size: Short/Medium/Long  
Angle: 0°/30°/45°/60°  
Star Burst  
Fish-eye  
Creates an image that  
looks as though it was  
shot with a fish-eye  
lens.  
Weak/Medium/Strong  
Changes the horizontal  
and vertical ratio of  
images.  
Slim  
±8 levels  
Creates an image that  
looks like a high  
HDR  
Weak/Standard/Strong  
dynamic range image.  
High Contrast: OFF/+1 to +5  
Soft Focus: OFF/+1/+2/+3  
Tone Break: OFF/Red/Green/Blue/  
Yellow  
Customize and save a  
Custom Filter filter to your own  
preferences.  
Shading Type: 6 types  
Shading Level: -3 to +3  
Distortion Type: 3 types  
8
Distortion Level: OFF/Weak/Medium/  
Strong  
Invert Color: OFF/ON  
Only JPEG and RAW files captured with this camera can be edited using the  
Digital Filter.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
229  
Applying the Digital Filter  
1
Select an image for applying the digital filter in Playback  
mode.  
2
3
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The playback mode palette appears.  
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select D (Digital  
Filter) and press the 4 button.  
The screen to select the filter appears.  
4
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to select a filter and  
100-0001  
Toy Camera  
press the 4 button.  
After selecting a filter, you can check the  
effects on the screen.  
You can select a different image by  
turning the e-dial.  
OK  
MENU  
Exit  
OK  
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to select the parameter  
and the four-way controller (45) to adjust the value.  
8
100-0001  
100-0001  
Red  
Slim  
OK  
OK  
MENU  
MENU  
Color Filter  
Slim Filter  
6
Press the 4 button.  
The save confirmation screen appears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
230  
7
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select [Use filters in  
Continue selecting filters  
combination] or [Save as].  
Select [Use filters in combination] when  
you want to apply additional filters to the  
same image.  
Use filters in combination  
Save as  
Cancel  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
8
Press the 4 button.  
If [Use filters in combination] was selected, the camera returns to Step 4.  
If [Save as] was selected, the filter-processed image is saved as a new  
image.  
Up to 20 filters, including a digital filter used during shooting (p.140), can be  
combined to the same image.  
Recreating Filter Effects  
Retrieves the setting of an image with filter effects and apply the same  
filter effects to other images.  
8
1
Select a filter-processed image in Playback mode.  
Select [Digital Filter] in the playback mode palette.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [Recreating filter  
effects] and press the 4  
button.  
Applying the digital filter  
Recreating filter effects  
Searching for the original image  
The history of the filter set for the  
selected image appears.  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
231  
4
To check the parameter details,  
press the M button.  
100-0001  
Reappliies folllowing digital filter  
effectts from ppreviouus image  
You can check the filter parameters.  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
6.  
7.  
8.  
9.  
10.  
11.  
12.  
13.  
14.  
15.  
16.  
17. - -  
18. - -  
19. - -  
20. - -  
OK  
MENU  
INFO  
Details  
OK  
5
6
Press the 4 button.  
The image selection screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
(45) to select an image for  
applying the same filter effects  
and press the 4 button.  
100-0001  
Performs ddigital filter  
processinng to this image  
You can only select an image that has not  
been processed with a filter.  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
The save confirmation screen appears.  
7
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select [Save as] and press the  
4 button.  
Saves the image as a new file  
8
The filter-processed image is saved as a  
new image.  
Save as  
Cancel  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
232  
Searching for the Original Image  
Searches for and displays the original image prior to digital filter  
application.  
1
Select [Searching for the original  
image] in Step 3 on p.230 and  
press the 4 button.  
Applying the digital filter  
Recreating filter effects  
The original image prior to digital filter  
application is retrieved.  
Searching for the original image  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
If the original image is no longer stored on the SD Memory Card, the message  
[Original image, prior to digital filter application, is not found] appears.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
233  
Developing RAW Images  
You can convert captured RAW files into JPEG files.  
Only RAW files captured with this camera can be edited. RAW files and JPEG  
files captured with other cameras cannot be edited on this camera.  
Developing One RAW Image  
1
Select a RAW image in Playback mode.  
2
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The playback mode palette appears.  
3
4
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select h (RAW  
Development) and press the 4 button.  
The screen to select the development method is displayed.  
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select [Developing Single  
JPEG  
Image] and press the 4 button.  
8
Developing Single Image  
Developing Multiple Images  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
The parameters recorded in the image file  
appear.  
12M  
RAW  
JPEG  
File Format  
You can select a different image by  
turning the e-dial.  
To specify the parameters before  
developing, refer to “Specifying the  
sRGB  
MENU  
OK  
100-0001  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
234  
5
6
Press the 4 button.  
The save confirmation screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select [Save as] and press the  
4 button.  
RAW JPEG  
Saves the image as a new file  
The RAW image is developed and saved  
as a new image.  
Save as  
Cancel  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
7
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select [Exit] and press the 4  
button.  
Image developed and stored.  
Continue developing?  
Select [Continue] to edit other images.  
Continue  
Exit  
OK  
OK  
Developing Multiple RAW Images  
You can develop multiple RAW images using the same settings.  
8
1
Select [Developing Multiple Images] in Step 4 on p.233 and  
press the 4 button.  
The multi-image display screen appears.  
Refer to p.204 for details on operations in the multi-image display screen.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select the RAW  
images to be developed and press the 4 button.  
Press the M button.  
The development confirmation screen appears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
235  
4
5
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select [Develop images as  
shot] or [Develop images with  
modified settings].  
Develop images as shot  
Develop images with  
modified settings  
To change the parameters, select  
[Develop images with modified settings].  
For details, refer to “Specifying the  
Parameters” (p.236).  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
The screen to select the parameter appears.  
Set [Recorded Pixels] and  
[Quality Level].  
12M  
Recorde
d
ixels  
P
Quality Level  
sRGB  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
6
7
Press the 4 button.  
The save confirmation screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [Save as] and  
press the 4 button.  
RAW JPEG  
8
Saves the image as a new file  
The selected RAW images are  
Save as  
Cancel  
developed and saved as new images.  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
236  
Specifying the Parameters  
Specify the parameters for developing RAW images.  
The following parameters can be changed.  
Parameter  
Recorded Pixels  
Quality Level  
Value  
Page  
E (4288×2848)/J (3936×2624)/  
P (3072×2048)/i (1728×1152)  
C(Best) / D(Better) / E(Good)  
Bright/Natural/Portrait/Landscape/Vibrant/  
Muted/Monochrome  
Custom Image  
F(Auto)/G(Daylight)/H(Shade)/  
^ (Cloudy)/JD (Fluorescent Light Daylight  
Color)/JN (Fluorescent Light Daylight  
White)/JW (Fluorescent Light Cool White)/  
JL (Fluorescent Light Warm White)/  
I(Tungsten Light)/L (Flash)/f/  
K(Manual)  
White Balance*1  
Sensitivity  
-2.0 to +2.0  
High-ISO NR  
OFF/Low/Medium/High  
OFF/Low/Medium/High  
OFF/ON  
Shadow Correction  
Distortion Correction*2  
Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj*2 OFF/ON  
Color Space  
sRGB/AdobeRGB  
8
*1 This cannot be set for RAW files taken in Multi-exposure mode.  
*2 This can be selected only when a compatible lens is attached. (p.192)  
1
Press the four-way controller  
(23) in Step 4 on p.233 to  
choose the parameter you want  
to change.  
12M  
RAW  
JPEG  
File Format  
sRGB  
MENU  
OK  
100-0001  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
237  
2
Use the four-way controller (45) to change the value.  
Use the four-way controller (5) to display the setting screen for White  
Balance and Custom Image.  
3
4
Press the 4 button.  
The save confirmation screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Save as] and  
press the 4 button.  
The RAW image is developed and saved as a new image.  
• You cannot save the background image or use Digital Preview with White  
Balance and Custom Image.  
• When the white balance is set to K(Manual), press the mc button to  
display the measuring screen.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
238  
Readjusting Images Shot in JPEG  
Format  
You can readjust Custom Image and White Balance for the image shot in  
JPEG format immediately after shooting it without deteriorating image  
quality.  
1
Set the file format to [JPEG] and shoot an image.  
Refer to p.177 for setting File Format.  
2
Press the four-way controller (4) to change White  
Balance, or press the four-way controller (5) to change  
Custom Image.  
The [White Balance] or [Custom Image] screen appears.  
3
Set White Balance or Custom Image as desired.  
Custom Image or White Balance can be set using the same procedures  
as before shooting.  
Refer to p.182 for setting White Balance and p.194 for setting Custom  
Image.  
4
5
Press the M button.  
The save confirmation screen appears.  
8
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Save as] and  
press the 4 button.  
The image with the White Balance or Custom Image setting is saved as  
a new image.  
The image can be readjusted only right after being shot. Adjustments cannot  
be made after new images are shot or the camera is turned off.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
9 Changing Additional  
Settings  
This chapter describes how to change additional settings.  
Language ............................................................243  
Convention .........................................................252  
Selecting the Power Settings ............................253  
Setting the DPOF Settings ................................255  
Exif .......................................................................257  
(Pixel Mapping) ...................................................259  
..............................................................................260  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
240  
How to Operate the Set-up Menu  
Perform various settings related to the camera in the [R Set-up] menu.  
For details on how to operate the menus, refer to “Using the Menus” (p.35).  
Set-up Menu Setting Items  
Perform the following settings in the [R Set-up 1-4] menus.  
Press the 3 button in Capture/Playback mode and use the four-way  
controller (45) to display the [R Set-up 1-4] menus.  
Menu  
Item  
Function  
Page  
Changes the language in which menus and  
messages appear.  
Language/u  
Date Adjustment  
Sets the date format and time.  
Sets the display of local date and time of a  
specified city in addition to the present  
location on the monitor when traveling  
overseas.  
World Time  
R1  
Sets the size of the text selected in the  
menus.  
Text Size  
Sets whether to display indicators in the  
monitor.  
Guide Display  
9
Beep  
Switches the beep tone on/off.  
Brightness Level  
Changes the brightness of the monitor.  
LCD Color Tuning Adjusts the color of the monitor.  
Sets the output format when connecting to  
Video Out  
an AV device with a video jack.  
Sets the USB connection mode when  
USB Connection  
R2  
connecting to a computer.  
Sets the method used to assign folder  
Folder Name  
names for storing images.  
Copyright  
Information  
Sets the photographer and copyright  
information embedded in Exif.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
241  
Menu  
Item  
Function  
Page  
Sets the time until the camera turns off  
automatically.  
Auto Power Off  
R3  
Selects the type of batteries inserted in the  
camera.  
Select Battery  
Reset  
Resets all settings.  
Maps out and corrects any defective pixels  
in the CMOS sensor.  
Pixel Mapping  
Detects dust adhering to the CMOS  
sensor.  
Dust Alert  
R4  
Dust Removal  
Sensor Cleaning  
Format  
Cleans the CMOS sensor by shaking it.  
Locks the mirror in the up position for  
cleaning the CMOS sensor.  
Formats the SD Memory Card.  
 [R Set-up 1] menu  
 [R Set-up 2] menu  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
English  
Brightness Level  
0
Date Adjustment  
World Time  
LCD Color Tuning  
Video Out  
USB Connection  
Folder Name  
NTSC  
MSC  
Date  
Standard  
3sec.  
Guide Display  
Beep  
Copyright Information  
MENU  
MENU  
Exit  
Exit  
9
 [R Set-up 3] menu  
 [R Set-up 4] menu  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Auto Power Off  
Select Battery  
Reset  
1min.  
AUTO  
Pixel Mapping  
Dust Alert  
Dust Removal  
Sensor Cleaning  
Format  
MENU  
MENU  
Exit  
Exit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
242  
Formatting an SD Memory Card  
Use this camera to format (initialize) an SD Memory Card that is unused  
or has been used on other cameras or digital devices.  
Formatting deletes all the data saved on the SD Memory Card.  
• Do not remove the SD Memory Card while formatting. The card may be  
damaged and become unusable.  
• Formatting deletes all data, either protected or unprotected. Be aware.  
1
Select [Format] in the [R Set-up 4] menu and press the  
four-way controller (5).  
The [Format] screen appears.  
2
Press the four-way controller (2)  
to select [Format].  
Format  
All data will be deleted  
Format  
Cancel  
OK  
OK  
3
Press the 4 button.  
Formatting starts.  
When formatting is completed, the screen  
that was displayed before selecting the  
menu appears again.  
Formattting  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
243  
Setting the Beep, Date and Time, and  
Display Language  
Setting the Beep  
You can turn the camera operation beep on or off.  
There are five items that you can set: In-focus, AE-L (AE lock operation  
sound), RAW (operation sound when [RAW Button Function] is assigned  
to the | button), Self-timer and Remote Control.  
The default setting is all O(On).  
1
Select [Beep] in the [R Set-up 1] menu and press the four-  
way controller (5).  
The [Beep] screen appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select an item and use  
Beep  
Setting  
the four-way controller (45) to  
In-focus  
select Oor P.  
AE-L  
RAW  
You can turn all the beeps off by selecting  
Self-timer  
Remote Control  
Z for [Setting].  
MENU  
3
Press the 3 button twice.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
244  
Changing the Date and Time Display  
You can change the initial date and time settings. You can also set the  
display style. Choose [mm/dd/yy], [dd/mm/yy] or [yy/mm/dd] for the date  
display format, and [12h] (12 hour) or [24h] (24 hour) for the time display  
format.  
Set in [Date Adjustment] of the [R Set-up 1]  
Date Adjustment  
menu (p.240).  
24h  
Date Format  
Date  
mm/dd/yy  
01 / 01 / 2009  
:
Time  
00 00  
Settings complete  
Cancel  
MENU  
Setting the World Time  
The date and time selected in “Initial Settings” (p.52) serve as the date and  
time of your present location.  
Setting the destination in [World Time] enables you to display the local  
date and time on the monitor when traveling overseas.  
1
Select [World Time] in the [R Set-up 1] menu and press  
the four-way controller (5).  
The [World Time] screen appears.  
9
2
Use the four-way controller (45)  
to select X (Destination) or W  
World Time  
Setting the Time  
(Hometown) for [Setting the  
Time].  
Destination  
:
16 00  
London  
Hometown  
New York  
This setting changes the date and time on  
the guide display and control panel.  
:
10 00  
MENU  
3
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The selection frame moves to X (Destination setting).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
245  
4
5
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The [X Destination] screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller (45)  
to select a destination city.  
Destination  
Turn the e-dial to change the region.  
The location, time difference and current  
time of the selected city appears.  
London  
DST  
+06:00  
16:00  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
6
7
Press the four-way controller (3) to select [DST].  
Use the four-way controller (45) to select Oor P.  
Select Oif the destination city uses daylight saving time (DST).  
8
9
Press the 4 button.  
The destination setting is saved.  
Press the 3 button twice.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.  
• Refer to “List of World Time Cities” (p.246) for cities that can be specified as  
a destination.  
• Select W (Hometown) in Step 2 to set the city and DST setting.  
X appears in the guide display and control panel if [Setting the Time] is set  
to X (Destination). (p.22)  
9
• When you switch [Setting the Time] to X (Destination), the video output  
(p.222) setting changes to the default setting for that city.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
246  
List of World Time Cities  
Region  
North  
America  
City  
Region  
Africa/  
West Asia  
City  
Honolulu  
Dakar  
Anchorage  
Vancouver  
San Francisco  
Los Angeles  
Calgary  
Algiers  
Johannesburg  
Istanbul  
Cairo  
Jerusalem  
Nairobi  
Denver  
Chicago  
Miami  
Jeddah  
Tehran  
Toronto  
Dubai  
New York  
Halifax  
Karachi  
Kabul  
Mexico City  
Lima  
Male  
Central and  
South  
America  
Delhi  
Santiago  
Caracas  
Buenos Aires  
Sao Paulo  
Rio de Janeiro  
Lisbon  
Colombo  
Kathmandu  
Dacca  
Yangon  
Bangkok  
Kuala Lumpur  
Vientiane  
Singapore  
Phnom Penh  
Ho chi Minh  
Jakarta  
East Asia  
Europe  
Madrid  
London  
Paris  
Amsterdam  
Milan  
9
Rome  
Hong Kong  
Beijing  
Copenhagen  
Berlin  
Shanghai  
Manila  
Prague  
Stockholm  
Budapest  
Warsaw  
Athens  
Taipei  
Seoul  
Tokyo  
Guam  
Helsinki  
Moscow  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
247  
Region  
Oceania  
City  
Perth  
Adelaide  
Sydney  
Noumea  
Wellington  
Auckland  
Pago Pago  
Setting the Display Language  
You can change the language in which the menus, error messages, etc.  
are displayed.  
You can choose from 20 languages: English, French, German, Spanish,  
Portuguese, Italian, Dutch, Danish, Swedish, Finnish, Polish, Czech,  
Hungarian, Turkish, Greek, Russian, Korean, Chinese (Traditional/  
Simplified) and Japanese.  
Set in [Language/u] of the [R Set-up 1]  
menu (p.240).  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
248  
Adjusting the Monitor and the Menu  
Display  
Setting the Text Size  
You can set the size of the text selected in the menus to [Standard]  
(normal display) or [Large] (magnified display).  
Set in [Text Size] of the [R Set-up 1] menu  
1
2
3
4
(p.240).  
English  
Date Adjustment  
World Time  
Text Size  
Guide Display  
Beep  
Standard  
Large  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Setting the Guide Display Time  
Set the length of time that the guides are displayed on the monitor when  
the camera is turned on or the Capture mode is changed. (p.22)  
Select from [3 sec.] (default setting), [10 sec.], [30 sec.] and [Off].  
Set in [Guide Display] of the [R Set-up 1]  
1
2
3
4
menu (p.240).  
English  
Date Adjustment  
World Time  
Text Size  
Guide Display  
Beep  
9
3sec.  
10sec.  
30sec.  
Off  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Setting the Status Screen Display  
You can set the display color of the status screen and control panel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
249  
1
Select [Status Screen] in the [ARec. Mode 3] menu and  
press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Status Screen] screen appears.  
2
Usethefour-way controller(45)  
to select from the six display  
Status Screen  
Display Color  
1
colors.  
1/125  
F5.6  
MENU  
3
Press the 3 button twice.  
The status screen display color settings are changed.  
Setting the Display for Instant Review  
You can set the Instant Review display time and whether or not to display  
the histogram and Bright/Dark Area warning. The default settings are  
[1 sec.] for the Instant Review display time and P(Off) for the histogram  
and Bright/Dark Area warning.  
1
Select [Instant Review] in the [ARec. Mode 3] menu and  
press the four-way controller (5).  
9
The [Instant Review] screen appears.  
2
Press the four-way controller (5)  
and use the four-way controller  
(23) to select a display time.  
Instant Review  
Display Time  
Histogram  
1sec.  
3sec.  
5sec.  
Off  
Bright/Dark Area  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
250  
3
4
Press the 4 button.  
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Histogram] or  
[Bright/Dark Area].  
5
6
Use the four-way controller (45) to select Oor P.  
Press the 3 button twice.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.  
Adjusting the Brightness of the Monitor  
You can adjust the brightness of the monitor. Adjust the settings when the  
monitor is hard to see.  
1
Select [Brightness Level] in the [R Set-up 2] menu and  
press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Brightness Level] screen appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller (45)  
to adjust the brightness.  
Brightness Level  
0
You can select from 15 brightness levels.  
9
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
3
4
Press the 4 button.  
Press the 3 button.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
251  
Adjusting the Color of the Monitor  
You can adjust the color of the monitor.  
1
Select [LCD Color Tuning] in the [R Set-up 2] menu and  
press the four-way controller (5).  
The [LCD Color Tuning] screen appears.  
2
Adjust the color.  
LCD Color Tuning  
Seven levels (225 patterns) are available  
on the G-M and B-A axes.  
G
B
A
M
0
0
OK  
MENU  
0
Cancel  
OK  
Available operations  
Four-way controller (23) Adjusts the tone of the colors between green (G)  
and magenta (M).  
Four-way controller (45) Adjusts the tone of the colors between blue (B)  
and amber (A).  
| (Green) button  
Resets the adjustment value.  
e-dial  
Displays a saved image in the background so  
you can adjust the color while viewing the  
image. This is useful for matching the color of  
the monitor with that of a computer.  
9
3
4
Press the 4 button.  
Press the 3 button.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
252  
Setting the Folder Name/File Number  
Naming Convention  
Selecting the Folder Name  
You can select a method for assigning the folder names for storing images.  
The two digits of the month and day on which the picture was taken  
are assigned as the folder name in the form of [xxx_MMDD]. [xxx] is  
a sequential number from 100 to 999. [MMDD] (month and day)  
appears according to the display style set in [Date Adjustment]  
Date  
(p.244). (default setting)  
Example) 101_0125: Folder for pictures taken on January 25th  
The folder name is assigned in the form of [xxxPENTX].  
Example) 101PENTX  
PENTX  
Set in [Folder Name] of the [R Set-up 2]  
1
2
3
4
menu (p.240).  
Brightness Level  
0
LCD Color Tuning  
Video Out  
USB Connection  
Folder Name  
NTSC  
MSC  
Date  
PENTX  
Copyright Information  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Selecting the File Number Setting  
9
You can select a method for assigning the file number of an image when  
saved to a new folder. Select Oor Pfor [File No.] in [Memory] (p.260) of  
the [ARec. Mode 4] menu.  
The file number of the last image saved to the previous folder is saved  
and subsequent images are assigned sequential file numbers even if  
a new folder is created.  
O
P
The file number of the first image saved to a folder returns to 0001  
each time a new folder is created for saving images.  
When the number of storable images exceeds 500, captured images are  
divided into folders of 500 images each. However, in Exposure Bracketing  
shooting, images will be stored in the same folder until shooting is completed,  
even if the number of images exceeds 500.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
253  
Selecting the Power Settings  
Setting Auto Power Off  
You can set the camera to turn off automatically if unused after a certain  
length of time. Select from [1 min.] (default setting), [3 min.], [5 min.],  
[10 min.], [30 min.] or [Off].  
Set in [Auto Power Off] of the [R Set-up 3]  
1
2
3
4
menu (p.241).  
Auto Power Off  
Select Battery  
Reset  
1min.  
3min.  
5min.  
10min.  
30min.  
Off  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
The Auto Power Off function does not work in the following situations.  
- When the Live View is displayed  
- When the slideshow is played back  
- When the camera is connected to a computer with the USB cable  
Setting the Battery Type  
Sets the type of batteries used in the camera. The default setting is [Auto-  
detect].  
9
1
Select [Select Battery] in the [R Set-up 3] menu and press  
the four-way controller (5).  
The [Select Battery] screen appears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
254  
2
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select the type of batteries.  
1
2
3
4
Auto Power Off  
Select Battery  
1min.  
AUTO  
When set to [Auto-detect], the camera will  
automatically detect the type of batteries  
being used.  
AUTO  
Li  
Auto-detect  
Lithium  
Nickel-Metal Hydride  
Alkaline  
Ni-MH  
AL  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
3
4
Press the 4 button.  
Press the 3 button twice.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.  
When a type of batteries different from that selected in the menu setting is  
used, the battery level will not be correctly determined. Please set the correct  
battery type. Usually, there is no problem using [Auto-detect]. However in low  
temperatures and when using batteries that were stored for long periods of  
time, set the appropriate battery type so the camera can correctly determine  
the remaining battery level.  
Setting the Operation of the Power Lamp  
Sets the operation of the power lamp from [Standard] (default setting),  
[Low] or [Off].  
Set in [20. Power lamp] of the [A Custom  
20. Power lamp  
9
Setting 3] menu (p.81).  
1
2
3
Standard  
Low  
Off  
The power lamp is lit  
when the camera is  
switched on  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Even if the power lamp is set to [Off], the lamp lights up while the camera is  
transferring data to a computer when connected using the USB cable.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
255  
Setting the DPOF Settings  
You can order conventional photograph prints by taking the SD Memory  
Card with recorded images to a store for printing.  
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) settings allow you to specify the  
number of copies and whether to imprint the date.  
• DPOF settings cannot be applied to RAW images.  
• You can make DPOF settings for up to 999 images.  
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in Playback mode.  
The playback mode palette appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select r (DPOF)  
and press the 4 button.  
The screen to select how to change the settings is displayed.  
3
4
5
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select [Single Image] or [All  
Images] and press the 4  
button.  
Single Image  
All Images  
OK  
MENU  
OK  
9
When [Single Image] is selected  
in Step 3, use the four-way  
controller (45) to select an  
image to set DPOF settings.  
100-0105  
Copies  
00  
Date  
OK  
MENU  
Date  
OK  
Use the four-way controller (23) to select the number of  
copies.  
You can set up to 99 copies.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
256  
6
7
Turn the e-dial to select Oor P  
for printing the date.  
100-0105  
O: The date will be printed.  
P: The date will not be printed.  
Repeat Steps 4 to 6 to set other images  
(up to 999).  
Copies  
01  
Date  
OK  
MENU  
Date  
OK  
Press the 4 button.  
The DPOF settings for the selected image is saved and the camera  
returns to Playback mode.  
• Depending on the printer or printing equipment at the photo processing lab,  
the date may not be printed on the pictures even if the date for DPOF setting  
is set to O.  
• The number of copies specified in settings for all images applies to all the  
images and the settings for single images are canceled. Before printing,  
check that the number is correct.  
To cancel DPOF settings, set the number of copies to [00] in Step 5 and press  
the 4 button.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
257  
Setting the Photographer Information  
Saved to Exif  
The camera type, shooting conditions and other information are  
automatically embedded in captured images in the Exif data format. You  
can embed photographer information in this Exif.  
Use the provided “PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4” software to check the Exif  
information.  
1
Select [Copyright Information] in the [R Set-up 2] menu  
and press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Copyright Information] screen appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller  
(45) to select Oor P.  
Copyright Information  
Embed Copyright Data  
O: Embeds copyright information in  
Photographer  
the Exif.  
Copyright Holder  
P: Does not embed copyright  
information in the Exif. (default  
setting)  
MENU  
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Photographer]  
and press the four-way controller (5).  
The text-entry screen appears.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
258  
4
Enter the text.  
Photographer  
Textselection  
cursor  
Finish  
Text input  
cursor  
Delete One Character  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
Enter  
Available operations  
e-dial  
Moves the text input cursor.  
Four-way controller  
Moves the text selection cursor.  
(2345)  
| (Green) button  
Switches between upper and lower case letters.  
4 button  
Enters a character selected with the text  
selection cursor at the position of the text input  
cursor.  
K/ibutton  
Deletes a character at the position of the text  
input cursor.  
5
After entering the text, move the  
text selection cursor to [Finish]  
and press the 4 button.  
Copyright Information  
Embed Copyright Data  
Photographer  
AAAA  
The camera returns to the [Copyright  
Information] screen.  
Copyright Holder  
MENU  
9
6
7
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Copyright  
Holder] and enter the text in the same way as  
[Photographer].  
Press the 3 button twice.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
259  
Correcting Defective Pixels in the  
CMOS Sensor (Pixel Mapping)  
Pixel Mapping is the function for mapping out and correcting defective  
pixels in the CMOS sensor.  
1
Select [Pixel Mapping] in the [R Set-up 4] menu.  
2
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Pixel Mapping] screen appears.  
3
Press the four-way controller (2)  
to select [Pixel Mapping] and  
press the 4 button.  
Pixel Mapping  
Checks the image sensor  
and corrects defective pixels  
Defective pixels are mapped and  
corrected, and the screen that was  
displayed before selecting the menu  
appears again.  
Pixel Mapping  
Cancel  
OK  
OK  
When the battery level is low, [Not enough battery power remaining to activate  
Pixel Mapping] is displayed on the monitor. Use the AC adapter kit K-AC84  
(optional) or change batteries with ample power remaining.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
260  
Selecting Settings to Save in the  
Camera (Memory)  
You can select which function settings to save when the camera is turned  
off. The following function settings can be saved.  
• Flash Mode  
• Cross Processing  
• Digital Filter  
• Drive Mode  
• White Balance  
• Sensitivity  
• HDR Capture  
• Shooting Info Display  
• Playback Info Display  
• File number  
• EV Compensation  
• Flash Exposure Compensation  
The default setting is Ofor all functions except Cross Processing, Digital  
Filter, HDR Capture and Shooting Info Display.  
1
Select [Memory] in the [ARec. Mode 4] menu.  
2
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Memory 1] screen appears.  
3
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to choose an item.  
1
2
Memory  
Flash Mode  
Drive Mode  
White Balance  
Turn the e-dial to display the [Memory 2]  
screen.  
Sensitivity  
9
EV Compensation  
Flash Exposure Comp.  
Cross Processing  
MENU  
4
5
Use the four-way controller (45) to select Oor P.  
O: Settings are saved even when the camera is turned off.  
P: Settings are cleared and returned to their default values when  
the camera is turned off.  
Press the 3 button twice.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
261  
• Set [File No.] to Oto continue the sequential numbering for the file name  
even if a new folder is created. Refer to “Selecting the File Number Setting”  
• When the [R Set-up] menu is reset (p.280), all Memory settings return to the  
default values.  
• If [Shooting Info Display] is set to P, the status screen is always displayed  
first when the camera is turned on.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
262  
Memo  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10Connecting to a  
Computer  
This chapter explains how to connect the camera to your  
computer, install the supplied CD-ROM, etc.  
Using the Provided Software ............................268  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
264  
Using Captured Images on a  
Computer  
The captured still pictures and movies can be transferred to a computer by  
connecting the a using a USB cable and can be managed using the  
provided software.  
We recommend the following system requirements to connect your  
camera to a computer or to use the software “PENTAX Digital Camera  
Utility 4” included in the CD-ROM (S-SW99).  
Windows  
Computer with Windows XP (Home Edition/Professional/x64  
Edition) SP2 or later, or Windows Vista preinstalled  
* With Windows 2000, you can only transfer images from your  
OS  
camera using a USB cable.  
Pentium 4 or higher (Intel Core Processor or higher  
recommended)  
CPU  
1.0 GB or more (2.0 GB or more recommended. For Windows  
Vista, 3.0 GB or more recommended)  
RAM  
Free Disk Space 1.0 GB or more (2.0 GB or more recommended)  
1280×1024 pixels or more with 24-bit full color (approximately  
16.77 million colors)  
Monitor  
Others  
USB 2.0 port must be standard equipment  
Macintosh  
Macintosh with Mac OS X 10.3.9, 10.4, or 10.5 preinstalled  
* With Mac OS X 10.2, you can only transfer images from your  
camera using a USB cable.  
OS  
PowerPC G5 or higher (Intel Core processor recommended.  
Universal Binary format)  
CPU  
RAM  
10  
1.0 GB or more (2.0 GB or more recommended)  
Free Disk Space 1.0 GB or more (2.0 GB or more recommended)  
1280×1024 pixels or more with 24-bit full color (approximately  
16.77 million colors)  
Monitor  
USB 2.0 port must be standard equipment, QuickTime 7.0 or  
Others  
later  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
265  
Saving Images on Your Computer  
Setting USB Connection Mode  
Set the USB connection mode when connecting to a computer via the  
provided USB cable (I-USB7). The default setting is [MSC].  
1
Select [USB Connection] in the [R Set-up 2] menu and  
press the four-way controller (5).  
2
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select [MSC] or [PTP].  
1
2
4
3
Brightness Level  
0
LCD Color Tuning  
Video Out  
USB Connection  
Folder Name  
NTSC  
MSC  
PTP  
Copyright Information  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
3
4
Press the 4 button.  
The setting is changed.  
Press the 3 button.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
266  
MSC and PTP  
MSC (Mass Storage Class)  
A general-purpose driver program that handles devices connected to  
the computer via USB as a memory device. Also indicates a standard  
for controlling USB devices with this driver.  
By simply connecting a device that supports USB Mass Storage  
Class, you can copy, read, and write files from a computer without  
installing a dedicated driver.  
PTP (Picture Transfer Protocol)  
A protocol that allows transfer of digital images and control of digital  
cameras via USB, standardized as ISO 15740.  
You can transfer image data between devices that support PTP  
without installing a device driver.  
Unless otherwise specified, select MSC when connecting the a  
to your computer.  
Saving Images by Connecting Your Camera  
and Your Computer  
1
Turn your computer on.  
2
Turn off your camera and use the provided USB cable to  
connect your camera and your computer.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
267  
3
Turn your camera on.  
The camera is recognized as a [Removable Disk] in [My Computer] for  
Windows.  
For Macintosh, an icon for the SD Memory Card appears on the desktop.  
• If the [Removable Disk Drive] dialog appears when the camera is turned on,  
select [Open folder to view files using Windows Explorer] and click the OK  
button.  
• When using Windows XP, if the SD Memory Card has a volume label, the  
volume label name appears instead of [Removable Disk]. A new unformatted  
SD Memory Card may show the manufacturer’s name or model number.  
4
5
Save the captured images to your computer.  
Drag and drop the image file(s) or the folder containing the image files in  
your camera to the hard disk of your computer or the desktop.  
Disconnect your camera from your computer.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
268  
Using the Provided Software  
“PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4” is included in the CD-ROM (S-SW99).  
Using the PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4, you can manage images  
saved on your computer and develop (process) and adjust the color of  
RAW files taken with the a.  
Compatible file formats: .bmp (BMP)/.jpg (JPEG)/.pef (files recorded in  
PENTAX’s original RAW format)/.pct (PICT)/  
.png (PNG)/.tif (TIFF)/.dng (DNG format RAW  
file)  
Installing the Software  
You can install the software from the provided CD-ROM.  
When multiple accounts have been setup on your computer, log on with  
an account that has administrative rights before installing the software.  
1
Turn your computer on.  
Close any other software that is open.  
2
Place the CD-ROM (S-SW99) into the CD-ROM drive on  
your computer.  
The [PENTAX Software Installer] screen appears.  
If the [PENTAX Software Installer] screen does not appear  
For Windows  
10  
1 Click [My Computer] from the Start menu.  
2 Double-click the [CD-ROM drive (S-SW99)] icon.  
3 Double-click the [Setup.exe] icon.  
For Macintosh  
1 Double-click the CD-ROM (S-SW99) icon on the desktop.  
2 Double-click the [PENTAX Installer] icon.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
269  
3
Click [PENTAX Digital Camera  
Utility 4].  
For Windows, proceed to Step 4.  
For Macintosh, follow the instructions  
on the screen to perform subsequent  
steps.  
4
5
Select the desired language in  
the [Choose Setup Language]  
screen and click [OK].  
When the [InstallShield  
Wizard] screen appears in the  
selected language, click  
[Next].  
Follow the instructions on the screen  
to perform subsequent steps.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
270  
The PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4 Screen  
When PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4 is launched, the following screen  
(browser) appears.  
The screenshots used in this explanation are for Windows.  
The Browser tab set (default setting)  
You can perform the file management functions such as viewing and  
managing the images.  
1
2
3
4
3
10  
5
1Menu Bar  
This executes functions or sets various settings.  
For Macintosh, the Menu bar appears at the top of the desktop.  
2Tool Bar  
Frequently used functions are provided as Tool bar buttons.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
271  
3Control Panel  
The shooting information and settings for the selected image appear in  
this panel. You can switch the panel tab sets by pressing the Browser,  
Laboratory and Custom buttons on the Tool bar.  
4File Display Pane  
The file list or the images in the selected folder appear here.  
5Status Bar  
Information on the selected item appears.  
The Laboratory tab set (default setting)  
The control panel for adjusting the image appears here.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
272  
The Custom tab set (default setting)  
The screen display can be customized here. The Custom tab sets  
enable you to customize whether to show/hide the various tab pages in  
accordance with your needs. With the default settings, all control panels  
are displayed.  
Viewing Detailed Information on the Software  
Refer to Help for details on using the software program.  
10  
1
Click the  
bar.  
button on the Tool  
Or, select [PENTAX Digital Camera  
Utility Help] from the [Help] menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
273  
Regarding Product Registration  
To better serve you, please take a moment to register your software.  
Click [Product Registration] on the  
screen in Step 3 on p.269.  
A world map for Internet Product  
Registration is displayed. If your  
computer is connected to the  
Internet, click the displayed country  
or region and then follow the  
instructions to register your software.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
274  
Memo  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11Appendix  
Default Settings ..................................................276  
Combinations .....................................................282  
Cleaning the CMOS Sensor ...............................285  
Optional Accessories ........................................289  
Error Messages ..................................................293  
Troubleshooting .................................................295  
Main Specifications ............................................298  
Glossary ..............................................................302  
Index ....................................................................307  
WARRANTY POLICY ..........................................313  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
276  
Default Settings  
The table below shows the factory default settings.  
The functions set in Memory (p.260) are saved even when the camera is  
turned off.  
Reset Setting  
Yes: The setting returns to the default setting with the reset function  
(p.280).  
No: The setting is saved even after reset.  
Direct Keys  
Reset  
Setting  
Item  
Default Setting  
Page  
Drive Mode  
9 (Single Frame Shooting)  
Yes  
Flash Mode  
Depends on Capture mode  
F(Auto)  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
White Balance  
Sensitivity  
AUTO (ISO 200 - 1600)  
b (5 AF Points)  
Select AF Point  
[ARec. Mode] Menu  
Reset  
Setting  
Item  
Default Setting  
Page  
Custom Image  
File Format  
Bright  
JPEG  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
JPEG Recorded Pixels  
JPEG Quality  
E (4288×2848)  
C(Best)  
P(Off)  
Highlight Correction  
Shadow Correction  
D-Range  
Setting  
11  
Off  
Distortion Correction  
Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj  
P(Off)  
Lens  
Correction  
P(Off)  
Cross Processing  
Digital Filter  
Off  
Not use any filters  
Off  
HDR Capture  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
277  
Reset  
Setting  
Item  
Default Setting  
Page  
Number of Shots  
2times  
P(Off)  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Multi-  
exposure  
Auto EV Adjustment  
AF Mode  
f
AE Metering  
L(Multi-segment)  
b (5 AF Points)  
X
Select AF Point  
Recorded Pixels  
Quality Level  
Sound  
C(Best)  
g (On)  
Movie  
Movie Aperture Control  
Shake Reduction  
Info Overlay  
Fixed  
l (Off)  
O(On)  
Show Grid  
P(Off)  
Live View Histogram  
Bright/Dark Area  
Autofocus Mode  
Status Screen  
P(Off)  
P(Off)  
I
(Face Detection AF)  
1
1 sec.  
P(Off)  
P(Off)  
sRGB  
PEF  
Display Time  
Histogram  
Instant  
Review  
Bright/Dark Area  
Color Space  
RAW File Format  
Green Button  
Green Button  
Custom Image*2  
Optical Preview*2  
Histogram  
P(Off)  
Digital  
Preview*2  
Bright/Dark  
Area  
P(Off)  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Green  
Button  
Digital Filter*2  
11  
Cancel  
after 1 shot  
O(On)  
RAW  
Button  
Function*2  
JPEG ´  
RAW+  
JPEG ´ RAW+  
Yes  
Center AF Point*2  
Action in M Mode  
e-dial in Program  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
P LINE  
P SHIFT  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
278  
Reset  
Setting  
Item  
Default Setting  
P(Off)  
Page  
Cross Processing, Digital  
Filter, HDR Capture,  
Shooting Info Display  
Yes  
Memory  
Other than the above  
functions  
O(On)  
Yes  
Shake Reduction  
Input Focal Length  
k (On)  
35 mm  
Yes  
Yes  
*1 The parameters specified in [Custom Image] are also reset.  
*2 The setting returns to [Green Button] after reset.  
Playback Mode Palette  
Reset  
Setting  
Item  
Image Rotation  
Default Setting  
Page  
Yes*  
Digital Filter  
Toy Camera  
Maximum sizeaccording to  
the setting  
Resize  
Maximum sizeaccording to  
the setting  
Cropping  
Slideshow  
Yes  
File Format: JPEG  
Recorded Pixels: E  
Quality Level: C  
RAW Development  
Yes  
Index  
Image Comparison  
Protect  
No  
No  
DPOF  
* The parameters specified in [Digital Filter] are also reset.  
[Q Playback] Menu  
11  
Reset  
Setting  
Item  
Interval  
Default Setting  
Page  
3 sec.  
Off  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Slideshow  
Screen Effect  
Repeat Playback  
Bright/Dark Area  
Quick Zoom  
P(Off)  
P(Off)  
P(Off)  
Playback  
Display Method  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
279  
Reset  
Setting  
Item  
Delete All Images  
Default Setting  
Page  
[R Set-up] Menu  
Reset  
Setting  
Item  
Default Setting  
Page  
According to default setting  
According to default setting  
W (Hometown)  
No  
No  
Language/u  
Date Adjustment  
World Time setting  
Yes  
No  
Hometown (City)  
Hometown (DST)  
Destination (City)  
Destination (DST)  
According to default setting  
According to default setting  
Same as Hometown  
Same as Hometown  
According to default setting  
3 sec.  
World  
Time  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Text Size  
Guide Display  
Beep  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
All O(On)  
Brightness Level  
LCD Color Tuning  
Video Out  
±0  
±0  
According to default setting  
USB Connection  
Folder Name  
Yes  
Yes  
MSC  
Date  
Embed Copyright  
Data  
P(Off)  
Yes  
Copyright  
Information Photographer  
Copyright Holder  
Auto Power Off  
Select Battery  
Reset  
No  
No  
1 min.  
Yes  
Yes  
Auto-detect  
Pixel Mapping  
Dust Alert  
11  
Dust Removal  
Dust  
Removal  
Start-up Action  
Yes  
P(Off)  
Sensor Cleaning  
Format  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
280  
[A Custom Setting] Menu  
Reset  
Setting  
Item  
Default Setting  
Page  
1. EV Steps  
1/3 EV Steps  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
2. Sensitivity Steps  
1 EV Step  
3. Expanded Sensitivity  
4. Meter Operating Time  
5. AE-L with AF Locked  
6. Link AE to AF Point  
7. Auto Bracketing Order  
8. WB When Using Flash  
9. AWB in Tungsten Light  
Off  
10 sec.  
Off  
Off  
0 - +  
Auto White Balance  
Subtle Correction  
10. AF/AE-L Button  
Enable AF1  
Yes  
11. AF with Remote Control  
12. Remote Control in Bulb  
13. Slow Shutter Speed NR  
14. High-ISO NR  
Off  
Mode1  
On  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Medium  
ISO 800  
Off  
15. High-ISO NR Start Level  
16. Release While Charging  
17. Flash in Wireless Mode  
18. Saving Rotation Info  
19. Auto Image Rotation  
20. Power lamp  
On  
On  
On  
Standard  
Off  
21. Catch-in Focus  
22. Using Aperture Ring  
Reset Custom Functions  
Prohibited  
11  
Resetting the Menu  
Resetting Rec. Mode/Playback/Set-up Menu  
Settings in the [ARec. Mode] menu, [Q Playback] menu, [R Set-up]  
menu, direct keys and playback mode palette can be reset to default  
settings.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
281  
Language/u, Date Adjustment, the city and DST settings for World Time,  
Text Size, Video Output, Copyright Information and [A Custom Setting] menu  
settings are not reset.  
1
Select [Reset] in the [R Set-up 3] menu and press the four-  
way controller (5).  
The [Reset] screen appears.  
2
Press the four-way controller (2)  
to select [Reset] and press the  
4 button.  
Reset  
Returns to default settings  
The settings are reset, and the screen  
that was displayed before selecting the  
menu appears again.  
Reset  
Cancel  
OK  
OK  
Resetting the Custom Menu  
Reset settings in [A Custom Setting] menu to default values.  
1
Select [Reset Custom Functions] in the [A Custom  
Setting 4] menu and press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Reset Custom Functions] screen appears.  
2
Press the four-way controller (2)  
to select [Reset] and press the  
4 button.  
Reset Custom Functions  
Returns the custom function  
settings to default values  
The settings are reset, and the screen  
that was displayed before selecting the  
menu appears again.  
Reset  
Cancel  
11  
OK  
OK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
282  
Functions Available with Various  
Lens Combinations  
Only DA, DA L and FA J lenses and D FA/FA/F/A lenses which have an s  
(Auto) position on the aperture ring can be used with factory default  
lenses and D FA/FA/F/A lenses with aperture ring set to a position other  
than s.  
z : Functions are available when the aperture ring is set to the sposition.  
# : Some functions are restricted.  
× : Functions are unavailable.  
DA  
FA J  
A
M
P
Lens  
[Mount type]  
DA L FA*6  
D FA  
[KAF]  
[KAF]  
[KAF]  
[KA]  
[K]  
[KAF2] [KAF2]  
[KAF3]  
Function  
Autofocus  
(Lens only)  
z
z
z
#
z
(With AF adapter 1.7×)*1  
Manual focus  
(With the focus indicator)*2  
(With matte field)  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Quick-Shift Focus System  
#
×
×
×
×
×
×
Five AF points/Eleven AF points  
Multi-segment metering  
e(Program) mode  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
×
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
#
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
#
#
#
#
#
×
K (Sensitivity Priority) mode  
b(Shutter Priority) mode  
c(Aperture Priority) mode  
a(Manual) mode  
11  
P-TTL Auto Flash*3  
Power Zoom  
Automatic obtaining the lens focal length  
information when using the Shake  
Reduction function  
Lens Correction function*4  
z
z
z
z
×
×
×
×
×
×
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
283  
*1 Lenses with a maximum aperture of f/2.8 or brighter. Only available at the sposition.  
*2 Lenses with a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or brighter.  
*3 When using the built-in flash and AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ, AF200FG or AF160FC.  
*4 Aberration correction is available in [Lens Correction] of the [ARec. Mode 1] menu. The  
[Distortion Correction] setting is disabled when using a DA 10-17mm FISH-EYE lens.  
*5 Only available with compatible lenses.  
*6 To use an F/FA SOFT 85 mm f/2.8 lens or FA SOFT 28 mm f/2.8 lens, set [22. Using  
Aperture Ring] in the [A Custom Setting 4] menu to [Permitted]. Pictures can be taken  
with the aperture you set, but only within manual aperture range.  
*7 The AF point is fixed to O (Spot).  
*8 c(Aperture Priority) Automatic Exposure with the aperture open. (Adjusting the aperture  
ring has no effect on the actual aperture value.)  
Lens names and mount names  
DA lenses with an ultrasonic motor and FA zoom lenses with power zoom  
use the KAF2 mount. DA lenses with ultrasonic motor and no AF coupler  
use the KAF3 mount.  
FA prime lenses (non-zoom lenses), DA or DA L lenses without ultrasonic  
motors and D FA, FA J and F lenses use the KAF mount.  
Refer to the lens manual for details. Note that this camera is not equipped  
with a power zoom function.  
Lenses and accessories that cannot be  
used with this camera  
When the aperture ring is set to other than the s(Auto) position or a lens  
without an sposition or accessories such as an auto extension tube or  
auto bellows are used, the camera will not operate unless [22. Using  
Aperture Ring] is set to [Permitted] in the [A Custom Setting 4] menu.  
Refer to “Notes on [22. Using Aperture Ring]” (p.284) for restrictions that  
apply.  
All camera capture modes are available when using DA/DA L/FA J or  
lenses with an aperture sposition set to the sposition.  
11  
Lens and Built-in Flash  
The built-in flash cannot be regulated and fully discharges when A lenses  
not set to the s(Auto) position, pre A lenses or soft focus lenses are used.  
Note that the built-in flash cannot be used as an Auto Flash.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
284  
Notes on [22. Using Aperture Ring]  
When [22. Using Aperture Ring] is set to  
22. Using Aperture Ring  
[Permitted] in the [A Custom Setting 4]  
menu, the shutter can be released even if the  
aperture ring of the D FA, FA, F or A lens is  
not set to the s(Auto) position or a lens  
without an sposition is attached. However,  
the features will be restricted as shown below.  
1
2
Prohibited  
Permitted  
Shutter will release when  
aperture ring is not set to the  
"A" position  
OK  
MENU  
Cancel  
OK  
Restrictions on using lenses with aperture ring set to a position other than  
s
Exposure  
Mode  
Lens Used  
Restriction  
The aperture remains open regardless  
of the aperture ring position. The  
c(Aperture shutter speed changes in relation to  
Priority) mode the open aperture but an exposure  
error may occur. In the viewfinder,  
D FA, FA, F, A, M (lens  
only or with auto  
diaphragm accessories  
such as auto extension  
tube K)  
[F--] appears for the aperture indicator.  
D FA, FA, F, A, M, S (with  
diaphragm accessories  
such as extension tube K)  
Pictures can be taken with the  
specified aperture value but an  
exposure error may occur. In the  
c(Aperture  
Priority) mode  
viewfinder, [F--] appears for the  
aperture indicator.  
Priority) mode  
Manualdiaphragmlenssuch c(Aperture  
as reflex lens (lens only)  
Pictures can be taken with the  
specified aperture value in the manual  
aperture range. In the viewfinder, [F--]  
c(Aperture appears for the aperture indicator.  
FA, F SOFT 85mm, FA  
SOFT 28mm (lens only) Priority) mode When the depth of field is checked  
(Optical Preview), exposure metering  
starts and the exposure can be  
checked.  
Pictures can be taken with the set  
aperture value and shutter speed. In  
the viewfinder, [F--] appears for the  
aperture indicator. When the depth of  
field is checked (Optical Preview),  
exposure metering starts and the  
exposure can be checked.  
11  
a(Manual)  
mode  
All lenses  
The camera operates in c(Aperture Priority) mode regardless of the mode  
dial setting other than a(Manual) mode when the aperture is set to other than  
the sposition.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
285  
Cleaning the CMOS Sensor  
Shadows may appear in the image on white backgrounds and other  
shooting conditions if the CMOS sensor becomes dirty or dusty. This  
indicates that the CMOS sensor must be cleaned.  
Removing Dust by Shaking the CMOS Sensor  
(Dust Removal)  
Shaking the CMOS sensor removes dust that has collected.  
1
Select [Dust Removal] in the [R Set-up 4] menu and press  
the four-way controller (5).  
The [Dust Removal] screen appears.  
2
Press the 4 button.  
Dust Removal  
The Dust Removal function is activated  
by shaking the CMOS sensor.  
Dust Removal  
Start-up Action  
To activate the Dust Removal function  
every time the camera is turned on, select  
[Start-up Action] and use the four-way  
controller (45) to select O.  
OK  
MENU  
Start  
When Dust Removal is completed, the  
camera returns to the [R Set-up 4] menu.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
286  
Detecting Dust on the CMOS Sensor  
(Dust Alert)  
Dust Alert is the function that detects dust adhering to the CMOS sensor  
and visually displays the location of the dust.  
You can save the detected image and display it when performing sensor  
cleaning (p.287).  
The following conditions must be met before using the Dust Alert function:  
- A DA, DA L, FA J lens or a D FA, FA and F lens that has an Aperture  
s(Auto) position is attached.  
- The aperture is set to the sposition when using a lens with an  
aperture ring.  
- The mode dial is set to any mode other than C (Movie).  
- The focus mode lever is set to =.  
1
Select [Dust Alert] in the [R Set-up 4] menu and press the  
four-way controller (5).  
The [Dust Alert] screen appears.  
2
Fully display a white wall or  
uniformly bright subject in the  
Dust Alert  
Checks for dust on the sensor.  
viewfinder and press the shutter  
release button fully.  
Press shutter release button  
to reveal dust location  
After image processing is performed, the  
Dust Alert image appears.  
MENU  
SHUTTER  
Check  
If the message [The operation could not  
be completed correctly] is displayed,  
press the 4 button and take another picture.  
3
Press the 4 button.  
11  
The image is saved and the camera  
returns to the [R Set-up 4] menu.  
OK  
x1  
Exit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
287  
• The exposure time may be extremely long when using the Dust Alert  
function. Note that if the direction of the lens is changed before processing is  
complete, dust will not be detected properly.  
• Depending on the subject conditions or temperature, dust may not be  
detected properly.  
• The Dust Alert image can only be displayed during sensor cleaning within 30  
minutes from the time the image is saved. If 30 minutes elapse, save a new  
Dust Alert image and then perform sensor cleaning.  
• The saved Dust Alert image cannot be displayed in Playback mode.  
• The Dust Alert image cannot be saved when an SD Memory Card is not  
inserted.  
• Regardless of the camera settings, the Dust Alert image will be taken with  
specific shooting conditions.  
• Press the M button or turn the e-dial when the Dust Alert image is  
displayed to view it at full screen display.  
Removing Dust with a Blower  
Raise the mirror up and open the shutter when cleaning the CMOS sensor  
with a blower.  
Please contact PENTAX Service Center for professional cleaning  
because the CMOS sensor is a precision part. Cleaning services involve  
a fee.  
You can use the optional Imagesensor Cleaning kit O-ICK1 (p.292) when  
cleaning the CMOS sensor.  
• Do not use a spray type blower.  
• Do not clean the sensor when the shutter speed is set to h.  
• Always cap the lens mount area to prevent dirt and dust from accumulating  
on the CMOS sensor when no lens is on the camera.  
• When the battery level is low, the message [Not enough battery power  
remaining to clean sensor] is displayed on the monitor.  
• It is recommended to use the AC adapter kit K-AC84 (optional) when cleaning  
the sensor. If you are not using the AC adapter kit K-AC84 (optional), please  
change batteries with ample power remaining. If the battery capacity  
becomes low during cleaning, a warning beep will sound. Please stop  
cleaning immediately.  
11  
• Do not put the tip of the blower inside the lens mount area. If the power is  
turned off, this may cause damage to the shutter, CMOS sensor or the mirror.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
288  
• The self-timer lamp blinks while cleaning the sensor.  
• This camera features a CMOS sensor shifting shake reduction system, and  
it may generate a vibration sound while cleaning the CMOS sensor. It is not  
a malfunction.  
1
Turn the camera off and remove the lens.  
Turn the camera on.  
2
3
Select [Sensor Cleaning] in the [R Set-up 4] menu and  
press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Sensor Cleaning] screen appears.  
4
5
Use the four-way controller  
Sensor Cleaning  
(23) to select [Mirror Up] and  
Raises mirror and open shutter  
press the 4 button.  
for access to clean sensor.  
Turn the power off to finish  
The mirror is locked in the up position.  
Mirror Up  
If you used Dust Alert to detect dust on  
the sensor within the last 30 minutes, the  
Dust Alert image appears on the monitor.  
Clean the sensor while checking the  
location of the dust.  
Cancel  
OK  
OK  
Clean the CMOS sensor.  
Use a brush-less blower to remove dirt  
and dust from the CMOS sensor. Using a  
blower with a brush may scratch the  
CMOS sensor. Do not wipe the CMOS  
sensor with a cloth.  
11  
6
7
Turn off the camera.  
Attach the lens after the mirror returns to its original  
position.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
289  
Optional Accessories  
A number of dedicated accessories are available for this camera. Please  
contact a PENTAX Service Center for details regarding accessories.  
Products marked with an asterisk (*) are the same as those supplied with  
the camera.  
Power Supply Accessories  
AC Adapter kit K-AC84  
(Set includes AC ADAPTER D-AC76, DC COUPLER D-DC84 and AC  
plug cord.)  
Lets you power your camera from an AC outlet.  
Flash Accessories  
Auto Flash AF540FGZ  
Auto Flash AF360FGZ  
The AF540FGZ and AF360FGZ are  
P-TTL auto flash units with a maximum  
guide number of 54 and 36 (ISO 100/m),  
respectively. Their features include  
slave-sync flash, contrast-control-sync  
flash, high-speed sync flash, wireless  
flash, slow-speed sync and trailing  
curtain sync flash.  
AF540FGZ  
11  
AF360FGZ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
290  
Auto Flash AF200FG  
The AF200FG is a P-TTL auto flash unit  
with a maximum guide number of 20  
(ISO 100/m). It features contrast-  
control-sync flash and slow-speed sync  
flash when combined with an  
AF200FG  
AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ unit.  
Auto Macro Flash AF160FC  
The AF160FC is a flash system  
especially designed for macro  
photography to take close, shadowless  
pictures of small objects. It is compatible  
with existing TTL auto flash functions  
and it can be used with a wide range of  
PENTAX cameras by using the provided  
adapter rings.  
AF160FC  
Hot Shoe Adapter FG  
Extension Cord F5P  
Hot Shoe Adapter FG  
Off-Camera Shoe Adapter F  
Use the adapters and cords to use the  
external flash away from the camera.  
Off-camera Shoe Adapter F  
Off-camera Shoe Clip CL-10  
When using the AF540FGZ or  
AF360FGZ as a wireless flash, this  
large clip is used for setting the external  
flash on a desk or table.  
11  
Off-camera Shoe Clip CL-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
291  
For Viewfinder  
Magnifier FB  
This viewfinder accessory is for  
magnifying the central area of the  
viewfinder 2×.  
You can see the entire view by simply  
flipping up the accessory from the eye-  
piece, as it is a hinge-type magnifier.  
Magnifier FB  
Ref-converter A  
This is an accessory that changes the  
viewfinder viewing angle at 90°  
intervals. The viewfinder magnification  
can be switched between 1× and 2×.  
Ref-converter A  
Diopter correction lens adapter M  
This accessory adjusts the diopter.  
Install it on the viewfinder.  
If it is difficult to see the viewfinder  
image clearly, choose one of the eight  
correction of approximately –5 to  
Diopter correction lens adapter M  
–1  
+3 m (per meter).  
Eyecup FQ (*)  
Remote Control F  
Lets you shoot pictures from within 4 m  
of the front of the camera.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
292  
Camera Case/Strap  
Camera Case O-CC84  
Camera Strap O-ST53 (*)  
Imagesensor Cleaning Kit O-ICK1  
Use this kit to clean the optical parts  
such as the CMOS sensor and lens of  
this camera.  
Others  
Body Mount Cap K  
Hot Shoe Cover FK (*)  
USB Cable I-USB7 (*)  
AV Cable I-AVC7  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
293  
Error Messages  
Error Message  
Description  
The SD Memory Card is full and no more  
images can be saved. Insert a new SD Memory  
Card or delete unwanted images. (p.44, p.75)  
Data may be saved when you perform the  
following operations.  
Memory card full  
• Change the file format to JPEG. (p.177)  
• Change the JPEG Recorded Pixels or JPEG  
Quality setting. (p.174, p.175)  
There are no images that can be played back  
on the SD Memory Card.  
No image  
You are trying to play back an image in a format  
not supported by this camera. You may be able  
to play it back on another brand of camera or  
your computer.  
This image cannot be  
displayed  
The SD Memory Card is not inserted in the  
camera. (p.44)  
No card in the camera  
Memory card error  
The SD Memory Card has a problem, and  
image capture and playback are impossible. It  
may be viewable on a computer but not with this  
camera.  
The SD Memory Card you have inserted is  
unformatted or has been formatted on another  
device and is not compatible with this camera.  
Use the card after formatting it with this camera.  
Card is not formatted  
Card is locked  
The write-protect switch on the SD Memory  
Card you have inserted is locked. Unlock the  
SD Memory Card. (p.45)  
The card is  
electronically locked  
Data is protected by the SD Memory Card  
security feature.  
11  
This image cannot be  
enlarged  
You are trying to enlarge an image that cannot be  
enlarged.  
You are trying to delete an image that is  
protected. Remove protection from the image.  
This image is protected  
Battery depleted  
The batteries are exhausted. Install new  
batteries in the camera. (p.39)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
294  
Error Message  
Description  
Appears during sensor cleaning if the battery  
level is insufficient. Replace the batteries with  
new ones or use the AC adaptor kit K-AC84  
(optional). (p.42)  
Not enough battery  
power remaining  
to clean sensor  
Appears during Pixel Mapping if the battery  
level is insufficient. Replace the batteries with  
new ones or use the AC adaptor kit K-AC84  
(optional). (p.42)  
Not enough battery  
power remaining to  
activate Pixel Mapping  
The maximum folder number (999) and file  
number (9999) are being used, and no more  
images can be saved. Insert a new SD Memory  
Card or format the card. (p.242)  
Image folder cannot be  
created  
The image could not be saved because of an  
SD Memory Card error.  
Unable to store image  
Settings not stored  
The DPOF settings could not be saved because  
SD Memory Card is full. Delete unwanted  
images and perform DPOF settings again.  
The camera was unable to measure the manual  
white balance or detect dust on the sensor. Try  
the operation again. (p.184, p.286)  
The operation could not be  
completed correctly  
No more images can be  
selected  
You cannot select 100 or more images at a time  
for Index (p.207) and Select & Delete (p.215).  
This RAW file cannot be  
developed  
RAW files captured with other cameras cannot  
be edited on this camera.  
Appears when Resize (p.224), Cropping  
(p.225), Digital Filter (p.227), or RAW  
Development (p.233) is started for images  
captured with other cameras, or when Resize or  
Cropping is started for minimum size images.  
This image cannot be  
processed  
The camera failed to create The creation of an index print image failed.  
an image  
Live View cannot be used because the  
camera’s internal temperature is too high.  
Press the 4 button and try using Live View  
again when the camera has cooled down.  
Camera overheated.  
Disabling Live View temporarily  
to protect circuitry  
11  
You are trying to set a function that is not  
available in Picture mode, H (Scene) mode or  
C (Movie) mode.  
This function is not available  
in the current mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
295  
Troubleshooting  
In rare cases, the camera may not operate correctly due to static  
electricity. This can be remedied by taking the batteries out and putting  
them back in again. When the mirror remains in the up position, take the  
batteries out and put them back in again. Then, turn the power on. The  
mirror will retract. After these procedures are done, if the camera operates  
correctly, it does not require any repairs.  
We recommend checking the following items before contacting a service  
center.  
Problem  
Cause  
Remedy  
Batteries are not  
installed  
Check if batteries are installed. If not, install  
charged batteries.  
The camera  
does not  
turn on  
Check the orientation of batteries.  
Re-insert batteries according to the +-  
symbols. (p.39)  
Batteries are not  
installed properly  
The battery power is Replace with charged batteries or use the  
low  
AC adapter kit K-AC84 (optional). (p.42)  
Set the lens aperture ring to the sposition  
(p.94) or select [Permitted] in [22. Using  
Aperture Ring] of the [A Custom Setting 4]  
The lens aperture  
ring is set to other  
than the sposition  
The shutter  
cannot be  
released  
The built-in flash is  
charging  
Wait until charging is finished.  
There is no available Insert an SD Memory Card with available  
space on the SD  
Memory Card  
space or delete unwanted images. (p.44,  
Recording  
Wait until recording is finished.  
Autofocus cannot focus well on subjects  
that have low contrast (the sky, white walls,  
etc.), dark colors, intricate designs, rapidly-  
moving objects or scenery shot through a  
window or a net-like pattern. Lock focus on  
another object located at the same distance  
as your subject, then aim at the target and  
press the shutter release button fully.  
The  
11  
Autofocus  
does not  
work  
The subject is  
difficult to focus on  
Alternatively, use manual focus. (p.121)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
296  
Problem  
Cause  
Remedy  
Position the subject in the focus frame in the  
middle of the viewfinder. If the subject is  
The subject is not in outside the focusing area, aim the camera  
the focusing area  
at the subject and lock the focus, then  
compose a picture and press the shutter  
release button fully. (p.119)  
The  
Autofocus  
does not  
work  
The subject is too  
close  
Move away from the subject and take a  
picture.  
The focus mode is  
set to \  
Set the focus mode lever to =. (p.112)  
Autofocus is not locked (focus lock) when  
[AF Mode] is set to k(including when  
the ksetting is automatically selected in  
f). The camera will continue focusing  
on the subject while the shutter release  
button is pressed halfway. If there is a  
subject that you want to focus on, set [AF  
Mode] to l(Single mode) and use the  
focus lock. (p.115)  
[AF Mode] is set to  
k
The focus  
cannot be  
locked  
Set Capture mode to any setting other than  
\ (Moving Object) in Picture mode, or  
n (Stage Lighting), R (Kids), Y (Pet) or  
l (Night Snap) in H (Scene) mode.  
The Capture mode  
is set to \ in Picture  
mode, or n, R, Y  
or l in H mode.  
The AE lock  
function  
The shutter speed is Set the shutter speed to any mode other  
does not  
operate  
set to h  
than h. (p.100)  
When the flash  
mode is set to C or Set the flash mode to b (Manual Flash  
, the flash will not Discharge) or D (Manual Flash+Red-eye  
C
discharge if the  
subject is bright  
Reduct.). (p.67)  
The built-in  
flash does  
not  
The mode dial is set Set mode dial to any setting other than  
to a  
a (Flash Off). (p.83)  
11  
discharge  
Set H (Scene) mode to any setting other  
than A (Night Scene), K (Sunset),  
n (Stage Lighting), U (Candlelight) or  
E (Museum). (p.85)  
H mode is set to  
A, K, n, U or  
E
The power  
zoom  
systemdoes  
not work  
The camera does  
not have the power Use manual zoom. (p.66)  
zoom function  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
297  
Problem  
Cause  
Remedy  
The USB  
connection  
with a  
computer  
does not  
work  
TheUSBconnection Set [USB Connection] in the [R Set-up 2]  
mode is set to [PTP] menu to [MSC]. (p.265)  
properly  
The Shake  
Reduction function Set [Shake Reduction] to on. (p.129)  
is off  
If a lens for which the focal length  
The Shake  
information cannot be obtained is used, set  
Reduction function  
the focal length in the [Input Focal Length]  
is not set properly  
Shake  
screen. (p.130)  
Reduction  
does not  
work  
Shutter speed is too  
low for the Shake  
Reduction function Set [Shake Reduction] to off and use a  
to be effective when tripod.  
panning or shooting  
night scenes, etc.  
The subject is too  
close  
Move away from the subject, or turn off the  
Shake Reduction function and use a tripod.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
298  
Main Specifications  
TTL autofocus, auto-exposure SLR digital-still camera with built-in  
retractable P-TTL flash  
Type  
Effective Pixels  
Sensor  
Approx. 12.4 megapixels  
Total pixels approx. 12.9 megapixels, CMOS with a primary color  
filter  
Still picture:  
pixels),  
E
(RAW/JPEG: 4288×2848 pixels),  
J
(3936×2624  
Recorded Pixels  
P
(3072×2048 pixels), (1728×1152 pixels)  
i
Movie: X (1280×720 pixels), Y (640×416 pixels)  
Sensitivity  
(Standard output  
sensitivity)  
Auto, Manual (ISO 200 to 6400 (EV steps can be set to 1 EV, 1/3  
EV or 1/2 EV))  
RAW (PEF/DNG), JPEG (Exif 2.21), DCF 2.0 compliant,  
DPOF compatible, Print Image Matching III compatible,  
RAW+JPEG simultaneous capturing compatible, For movies: AVI  
File Format  
JPEG Quality  
C (Best), D (Better), and E (Good)  
Storage Medium  
SD Memory Card, SDHC Memory Card  
Approximate Number of Shots  
SD Memory Card Capacity  
2 GB 1 GB 512 MB 256 MB 128 MB  
Recorded  
Pixels  
File Format/  
JPEG Quality  
4 GB  
194  
| (PEF)  
| (DNG)  
C
D
98  
98  
48  
48  
24  
24  
12  
12  
6
6
E
4288×2848  
192  
553  
281  
138  
244  
479  
163  
289  
564  
267  
468  
902  
805  
1373  
2518  
69  
35  
17  
E
4288×2848  
973  
495  
122  
239  
81  
61  
31  
1915  
652  
975  
120  
41  
61  
E
332  
21  
C
D
J
3936×2624  
1149  
2234  
1068  
1856  
3549  
3176  
5485  
10057  
585  
144  
282  
133  
234  
450  
402  
686  
1258  
72  
37  
1138  
543  
142  
67  
73  
E
34  
C
D
P
3072×2048  
945  
118  
227  
203  
346  
634  
60  
11  
1807  
1617  
2793  
5121  
116  
104  
177  
325  
E
C
D
i
1728×1152  
E
JPEG Quality (Compression): C (Best) = 1/4.5, D (Better) = 1/8, E (Good) = 1/16  
* The number of storable images may vary depending on the subject, shooting conditions,  
shooting mode and SD Memory Card, etc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
299  
Approximate Movie Recording Time  
SD Memory Card Capacity  
2 GB 1 GB 512 MB 256 MB 128 MB  
Recorded  
Quality  
Pixels  
4 GB  
11 min. 5 min. 2 min. 1 min.  
45 sec. 49 sec. 56 sec. 28 sec.  
44 sec. 22 sec.  
C
D
E
X
1280×720  
16 min. 8 min. 4 min. 2 min. 1 min.  
29 sec. 23 sec. 08 sec. 04 sec. 02 sec.  
32 sec.  
45 sec.  
23 min. 11 min. 5 min. 2 min. 1 min.  
07 sec. 46 sec. 49 sec. 54 sec. 28 sec.  
39 min. 20 min. 9 min. 4 min. 2 min. 1 min.  
26 sec. 05 sec. 52 sec. 56 sec. 29 sec. 16 sec.  
C
D
54 min. 27 min. 13 min. 6 min. 3 min. 1 min.  
21 sec. 41 sec. 47 sec. 53 sec. 28 sec. 47 sec.  
Y
640×416  
1 hr.  
37 min. 19 min. 9 min. 4 min. 2 min.  
56 sec. 00 sec. 29 sec. 47 sec. 27 sec.  
14 min.  
29 sec.  
E
* Movie recording time is based on our standard measuring conditions. The above figures  
may vary depending on the subject, shooting conditions and SD Memory Card, etc.  
Auto, Daylight, Shade, Cloudy, Fluorescent Light (D: Daylight  
White Balance  
Monitor  
Color, N: Daylight White, W: Cool White, L: Warm White),  
Tungsten Light, Flash, CTE, Manual, fine tuning available  
2.7 inch wide viewing field TFT color LCD with approx. 230,000  
dots, brightness and color adjustment functions  
Single frame, Multi-image display, zoom display (up to 16 times,  
scrolling possible), image comparison, rotating, calendar display,  
Playback Function folder display, slideshow, histogram, bright/dark area, resize,  
cropping, index (Thumbnails/Square/Random 1/Random 2/  
Random 3/Bubble)  
eProgram, K Sensitivity priority, bShutter priority,  
c Aperture priority, aManual, C Movie  
Picture mode: I Auto Picture, = Portrait, s Landscape,  
q Macro, \ Moving Object, . Night Scene  
Portrait, a Flash Off (When shooting with Live  
View, d (Blue Sky) and K (Sunset) can also be  
Exposure Mode  
selected.)  
11  
Scene mode: A Night Scene, Q Surf & Snow, K Food,  
K Sunset, n Stage Lighting, R Kids, Y Pet,  
U Candlelight, E Museum, l Night Snap  
Electronically controlled vertical-run focal-plane shutter, Speed  
range (1) Auto 1/6000 to 30 sec. (stepless), (2) Manual 1/6000 to  
Shutter  
30 sec. (Selectable between 1/3 EV and 1/2 EV for EV steps),  
Bulb, Electromagnetic release, Shutter lock by setting the main  
switch to OFF position  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
300  
PENTAX KAF2 bayonet mount (AF coupler, lens information  
contacts, K-mount with power contacts)  
Lens Mount  
Lens Used  
PENTAX KAF3 mount lenses, KAF2 mount lenses (power zoom not  
available), KAF mount lenses, KA mount lenses  
TTL phase-matching autofocus system, SAFOX VIII (11-point  
AF), AF operational brightness range: EV –1 to 18 (at ISO 100  
with f/1.4 lens), Focus lock available, Focus Mode: f (Auto)/  
l (Single)/k (Continuous)/\  
Autofocus  
System  
Penta-mirror viewfinder, Natural-Bright-Matte II focusing screen,  
Field of view: approx. 96%, Magnification: approx. 0.85× (with 50  
mm f/1.4 lens at ), Diopter: approx. –2.5 to +1.5m-1 (per meter)  
Viewfinder  
Focus information: ]is displayed when in-focus and blinking  
when unable to focus, b is lit = Built-in flash ready, b is blinking  
= Flash should be used, Shutter speed, Sensitivity, Aperture  
value, e-dial enabled indicator, @ = AE lock, Capacity remaining,  
m = EV Compensation, \= Manual focus, Picture mode icon,  
Shake Reduction display  
Viewfinder  
Indicator  
Live View:  
TTL method using the image sensor, Zoom  
Display and Show Grid are available  
Optical Preview:Depth of field confirmation (electronically  
controlled and available in all exposure modes)  
Digital Preview: Composition, exposure, focus and white balance  
confirmation  
Preview Function  
Approx. 4.7 fps (JPEG (E, C, Hi): up to 17 frames, RAW:  
up to 5 frames)  
Continuous  
Shooting (Hi/Lo)  
Approx. 2 fps (JPEG (E, C, Lo): until SD Memory Card is  
full, RAW: up to 11 frames)  
Electronically controlled with delay time of 12 sec./2 sec. (with the  
mirror lock-up function). Start by pressing the shutter release  
button. Operation confirmation: Possible to set beep. Can be  
cancelled after activation.  
Self-timer  
PENTAX Remote Control F (optional) Release shutter  
immediately or three seconds after pressing the remote control  
shutter release button  
Remote Control  
Mirror  
Quick-return mirror, mirror lock-up function (2 sec. self-timer)  
Toy Camera, Retro, High Contrast, Extract Color, Soft, Star Burst,  
Fish-eye, Monochrome, Color, Water Color, Pastel, Slim,  
Miniature, HDR, Base Parameter Adj, Custom Filter  
Digital Filter  
11  
Image Tone (7 types), Saturation, Hue, Contrast, Sharpness/Fine  
Sharpness, High/Low Key Adj, Filter Effect, Toning  
Custom Image  
Three frames (underexposed, standard (proper exposure) and  
overexposed) are shot continuously with exposure bracketing.  
(Selectable between 1/3 EV and 1/2 EV for EV steps)  
Exposure  
Bracketing  
Select the number of shots between 2 and 9 (Auto EV Adjustment  
can be set according to the number of shots)  
Multi-exposure  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
301  
TTL multi (16-segment metering), Exposure range from EV 1 to  
EV 21.5 at ISO 200, with 50 mm f/1.4 lens, Center-weighted or  
Spot metering method can be set  
Exposure Meter/  
Exposure Range  
EV Compensation ±3 EV (1/3 EV, 1/2 EV Steps), EV Steps can be selected  
Can be assigned to the =/L button using the custom  
function setting (timer type: two times the meter operating time set  
in the custom function setting) Continuous as long as the shutter  
AE Lock  
release button is halfway pressed.  
P-TTL built-in flash with serial control, GN approx. 16 (ISO 200),  
Angles of coverage: 28 mm lens angle of view (35 mm  
Built-in Flash  
equivalent), Flash synchronization speed range at 1/180 sec. and  
slower, Daylight-sync flash, Slow-speed Sync flash, Auto-popup  
function  
Hot shoe with M-contact, which couples with PENTAX dedicated  
auto flashes, ISO range = P-TTL: 100 to 1600, Automatic flash,  
Red-eye reduction flash function, High-speed-sync and wireless-  
sync with PENTAX dedicated flash  
External Flash  
Sync  
Custom Function  
Time Function  
22 functions can be set  
World Time settings for 75 cities (28 time zones)  
Shake Reduction  
Function  
CMOS Image Sensor Shift, effective compensation range = up to  
4 EV (dependent on the used lens type and shooting conditions)  
SP coating and CMOS sensor operations for dust removal. Can  
be set to operate when the camera is turned on.  
Dust Removal  
Power  
Four AA lithium, AA Ni-MH rechargeable, or AA alkaline batteries  
Battery Exhaustion Battery exhaustion symbol z is lit.  
In/Out Port  
PC/AV terminal (USB 2.0 (high speed compatible))  
Video Output  
Format  
NTSC/PAL  
Approx. 122.5 mm (W) × 91.5 mm (H) × 67.5 mm (D) (excluding  
protrusions), approx. 515 g (body only), approx. 580 g (including  
four AA lithium batteries and an SD Memory Card), approx. 615 g  
(including four AA alkaline batteries and an SD Memory Card)  
Dimensions and  
Weight  
Hot shoe cover FK, Eyecup FQ, Body mount cover, USB cable  
I-USB7, Software (CD-ROM) S-SW99 (PENTAX Digital Camera  
Utility 4), Strap O-ST53, AA lithium batteries (four), Operating  
Manual (this book)  
Accessories  
Languages  
11  
English, French, German, Spanish, Portuguese, Italian, Dutch,  
Danish, Swedish, Finnish, Polish, Czech, Hungarian, Turkish,  
Greek, Russian, Korean, Chinese (Traditional/Simplified) and  
Japanese  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
302  
Glossary  
AdobeRGB  
Color space recommended by Adobe Systems, Inc. for commercial  
printing. Wider range of color reproduction than sRGB. Covers most of the  
color range so colors available only when printed are not lost when editing  
images on a computer. When image is opened by non-compatible  
software, the colors look lighter.  
AE Metering  
Brightness of subject is measured to determine exposure. In this camera,  
select from [Multi-segment Metering], [Center-weighted Metering] and  
[Spot Metering].  
AF point  
Position in the viewfinder that determines focus. In this camera, select  
from [Auto], [Select] and [Spot].  
Aperture  
The aperture increases or reduces the light beam (thickness) passing  
through the lens to the CMOS sensor.  
Bright Portion  
Overexposed area in the image loses contrast and appears white.  
Camera Shake (Blur)  
When the camera moves while the shutter is open, the entire image  
appears blurred. This occurs more often when shutter speed is low.  
Prevent camera shake by raising the sensitivity, using the flash, and  
raising the shutter speed. Alternatively, use a tripod to stabilize the  
camera. As camera shake is most likely to occur when pressing the shutter  
release button, use the Shake Reduction function, the self-timer or the  
remote control unit to prevent camera movement.  
11  
CMOS sensor  
Photography element which converts the light entering through the lens  
into electric signals that create the image.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
303  
Color Space  
A defined range of colors from the spectrum which are used. In digital  
cameras, [sRGB] is defined as the standard by Exif. In this camera,  
[AdobeRGB] is also used because of the richer color expression over  
sRGB.  
Color Temperature  
This numerically expresses the color of the light source illuminating the  
subject. This is indicated in absolute temperature, using Kelvin (K) units.  
The color of light shifts to a bluish color as the color temperature rises, and  
to a reddish color as the color temperature falls.  
Dark Portion  
Underexposed area in the image loses contrast and appears black.  
DCF (Design rule for Camera File system)  
A digital camera file system standard established by the Japan Electronics  
and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA).  
Depth of field  
Area of focus. This depends on the aperture value, lens focal length, and  
distance to the subject. For example, select a smaller aperture value  
(higher number) to increase the depth of field or use a larger aperture  
value (smaller number) to decrease the depth of field.  
DNG RAW file  
DNG (Digital Negative) is a general-purpose RAW file format designed by  
Adobe Systems. When images captured in proprietary RAW formats are  
converted to DNG format, support and compatibility for the images  
increases significantly.  
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format)  
Rules for writing information onto a card with recorded images regarding  
the specific images and number of copies to be printed. Prints can easily  
be made by taking the images to a DPOF photo printing store.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
304  
Dynamic Range (D-Range)  
Indicated with a value expressing the light level reproducible in an image.  
This is the same as the term “Exposure latitude” used with silver halide  
film.  
Generally, when the dynamic range is wide, overexposed and/or  
underexposed areas are less likely to occur within the image, and when  
the dynamic range is narrow, all image tones can be reproduced sharply  
and accurately.  
EV (Exposure Value)  
Exposure value is determined by the combination of the aperture value  
and the shutter speed.  
EV Compensation  
Process of adjusting the image brightness by changing the shutter speed  
and/or aperture value.  
Exif (Exchangeable image file format for digital still camera)  
A standard digital camera file format established by the Japan Electronics  
and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA).  
Exposure Bracketing  
For automatically changing exposure. When the shutter release button is  
pressed, three images are captured. The first one has no compensation,  
the second is underexposed and the third is over-exposed.  
Histogram  
A graph that shows the darkest and brightest points in an image. The  
horizontal axis represents the brightness and the vertical axis represents  
the number of pixels. This is useful when you wish to refer to the exposure  
status of an image.  
ISO Sensitivity  
11  
The level of sensitivity to light. With a high sensitivity, images can be shot  
with a high shutter speed even in dark places, reducing camera shake.  
However, images taken with a high sensitivity are more susceptible to  
noise.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
305  
JPEG  
An image compression method. In this camera, select from C(Best),  
D(Better), or E(Good). Images recorded in JPEG format are suited for  
viewing on your computer or for attaching to e-mail.  
ND (Neutral Density) Filter  
A filter available in different saturation levels that adjusts the brightness  
without affecting the color tone of pictures.  
Noise Reduction  
Process to reduce noise (image roughness or unevenness) caused by  
slow shutter speed or high sensitivity shooting.  
NTSC/PAL  
These are video output formats. NTSC is mainly used in Japan, North  
America, and South Korea. PAL is mainly used in Europe and in China.  
Quality Level  
This refers to the image compression ratio. The lower the compression,  
the more detailed the image. The image becomes rougher as the  
compression rate rises.  
RAW data  
Unedited image data output from the CMOS sensor. RAW data are data  
before being internally processed by the camera. Camera settings at the  
time of capture, such as White Balance, Contrast, Saturation, and  
Sharpness can be set for each frame after shooting. In addition, RAW data  
are 12 bit data that contain 16 times the information of 8 bit JPEG data.  
Rich gradations are possible. Transfer RAW data to your computer and  
use the provided software to create image data with different settings,  
such as JPEG.  
Recorded Pixels  
11  
Indicates the size of the image by the number of pixels. The more pixels  
that compose a picture, the larger the image size.  
Shutter Speed  
The length of time that the shutter is open and light strikes the CMOS  
sensor. The amount of light that strikes the CMOS sensor can be changed  
by altering the shutter speed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
306  
sRGB (standard RGB)  
International standard of color space established by the IEC (International  
Electrotechnical Commission). This is defined from color space for  
computer monitors and is also used as the standard color space for Exif.  
Vignetting  
The picture edges are blackened when part of the light coming from the  
subject is blocked by the hood or filter ring, or when the flash is partially  
blocked by the lens.  
White Balance  
While shooting, color temperature is adjusted to match the light source so  
that the subject appears to have correct color.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
307  
Index  
Symbols  
B
Base Parameter Adj (Digital  
Filter) ....................................227  
11  
A
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
308  
C
Continuous mode  
k ............................ 112, 115  
Contrast-Control-Sync (Flash)  
............................................. 171  
E
11  
D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
309  
H
High/Low Key Adjustment  
F
Filter Effect (Custom Image)  
............................................. 194  
(Custom Image) ....................194  
High-Speed Flash Sync  
Mode ....................................164  
Flash Exposure Compensation  
............................................... 72  
Fluorescent Light (White  
Balance) ............................... 182  
Four-way controller  
I
J
11  
K
G
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
310  
Monochrome (Digital Filter)  
L
.............................................227  
Lateral chromatic aberration  
N
Ni-MH rechargeable batteries  
...............................................39  
M
O
P
PENTAX Digital Camera  
11  
Utility 4 ..................................268  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
311  
S
Saturation (Custom Image)  
.............................................194  
Sharpness (Custom Image)  
.............................................194  
Q
R
Remaining image storage  
11  
capacity .................................. 41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
313  
WARRANTY POLICY  
All PENTAX cameras purchased through authorized bona fide  
photographic distribution channels are guaranteed against defects of  
material or workmanship for a period of twelve months from date of  
purchase. Service will be rendered, and defective parts will be replaced  
without cost to you within that period, provided the equipment does not  
show evidence of impact, sand or liquid damage, mishandling, tampering,  
battery or chemical corrosion, operation contrary to operating instructions,  
or modification by an unauthorized repair shop. The manufacturer or its  
authorized representatives shall not be liable for any repair or alterations  
except those made with its written consent and shall not be liable for  
damages from delay or loss of use or from other indirect or consequential  
damages of any kind, whether caused by defective material or  
workmanship or otherwise; and it is expressly agreed that the liability of  
the manufacturer or its representatives under all guarantees or warranties,  
whether expressed or implied, is strictly limited to the replacement of parts  
as hereinbefore provided. No refunds will be made on repairs by non-  
authorized PENTAX service facilities.  
Procedure During 12-month Warranty Period  
Any PENTAX which proves defective during the 12-month warranty period  
should be returned to the dealer from whom you purchased the equipment  
or to the manufacturer. If there are no representatives of the manufacturer  
in your country, send the equipment to the manufacturer, with postage  
prepaid. In this case, it will take a considerable length of time before the  
equipment can be returned to you owing to the complicated customs  
procedures required. If the equipment is covered by warranty, repairs will  
be made and parts replaced free of charge, and the equipment will be  
returned to you upon completion of servicing. If the equipment is not  
covered by warranty, regular charges of the manufacturer or of its  
representatives will apply. Shipping charges are to be borne by the owner.  
If your PENTAX was purchased outside of the country where you wish to  
have it serviced during the warranty period, regular handling and servicing  
fees may be charged by the manufacturer’s representatives in that  
country. Notwithstanding this, your PENTAX returned to the manufacturer  
will be serviced free of charge according to this procedure and warranty  
policy. In any case, however, shipping charges and customs clearance  
fees to be borne by the sender. To prove the date of your purchase when  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
314  
required, please keep the receipt or bills covering the purchase of your  
equipment for at least a year. Before sending your equipment for servicing,  
please make sure that you are sending it to the manufacturer’s authorized  
representatives or their approved repair shops, unless you are sending it  
directly to the manufacturer. Always obtain a quotation for the service  
charge, and only after you accept the quoted service charge, instruct the  
service station to proceed with the servicing.  
• This warranty policy does not affect the customer’s statutory  
rights.  
• The local warranty policies available from PENTAX distributors in  
some countries can supersede this warranty policy. Therefore, we  
recommend that you review the warranty card supplied with your  
product at the time of purchase, or contact the PENTAX distributor  
in your country for more information and to receive a copy of the  
warranty policy.  
11  
The CE Mark is a Directive conformity mark of the European  
Union.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
315  
For customers in USA  
STATEMENT OF FCC COMPLIANCE  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject  
to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful  
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
Changes or modifications not approved by the party responsible for  
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a  
Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against  
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment  
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not  
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful  
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that  
interference will not occur in a particular installation.  
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television  
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on,  
the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of  
the following measures:  
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to  
which the receiver is connected.  
* Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
For customers in Canada  
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.  
Pour les utilisateurs au Canada  
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003  
du Canada.  
11  
FOR CALIFORNIA, U.S.A. ONLY  
Perchlorate Material-special handling may apply.  
The lithium battery used in this camera contains perchlorate material,  
which may require special handling.  
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Declaration of Conformity  
According to 47CFR, Parts 2 and 15 for  
Class B Personal Computers and Peripherals  
We:  
PENTAX Imaging Company  
A Division of PENTAX of America, Inc.  
Located at:  
600 12th Street, Suite 300  
Golden, Colorado 80401 U.S.A.  
Phone: 303-799-8000 FAX: 303-790-1131  
Declare under sole responsibility that the product identified herein  
complies with 47CFR Parts 2 and 15 of the FCC rules as a Class B digital  
device. Each product marketed is identical to the representative unit tested  
and found to be compliant with the standards. Records maintained  
continue to reflect the equipment being produced can be expected to be  
within the variation accepted, due to quantity production and testing on the  
statistical basis as required by 47CFR §2.909. Operation is subject to the  
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful  
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired operation. The above  
named party is responsible for ensuring that the equipment complies with  
the standards of 47CFR §15.101 to §15.109.  
Product Name: PENTAX Digital Still Camera  
Model Number:  
a
Contact person: Customer Service Manager  
Date and Place: September, 2009, Colorado  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old  
Equipment and Used Batteries  
1. In the European Union  
These symbols on the products, packaging and/or  
accompanying documents mean that used electrical and  
electronic equipments and batteries should not be mixed with  
general household waste.  
Used electrical/electronic equipments and batteries must be  
treated separately and in accordance with legislation that  
requires proper treatment, recovery and recycling of these  
products.  
Following the implementation by member states, private  
households within the EU states may return their used  
electrical/electronic equipments and batteries to designated  
collection facilities free of charge*.  
In some countries your local retailer may also take back your  
old product free of charge if you purchase a similar new one.  
*Please contact your local authority for further details.  
By disposing of this product correctly you will help ensure that  
the waste undergoes the necessary treatment, recovery and  
recycling and thus prevent potential negative effects on the  
environment and human health which could otherwise arise  
due to inappropriate waste handling.  
2. In other countries outside the EU  
These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you  
wish to discard these items, please contact your local  
authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.  
For Switzerland: Used electrical/electronic equipment can be  
returned free of charge to the dealer, even when you don't  
purchase a new product. Further collection facilities are listed  
on the home page of www.swico.ch or www.sens.ch.  
Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):  
This symbol might be used in combination with a designation  
for the chemical element or compound in use. In this case you  
have to comply with the requirement set by the Directive for the  
chemicals involved.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memo  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memo  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memo  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memo  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Paxar Car Seat 7112 ff User Manual
Pentax Barcode Reader PTS III User Manual
Philips CRT Television WA841670 82 User Manual
Philips DVD Recorder HDR3500 User Manual
Philips TV VCR Combo 14 PV 111 User Manual
Philips Water System AZ 2785 User Manual
Pioneer Car Stereo System DEH 80PRS User Manual
Powermate Battery Charger PC0102300 User Manual
Precor Treadmill EFX534 User Manual
Precor Treadmill M920 User Manual